Canon - Elura 10A, 20MCA - Service Manual

Video Product
ELURA20 MC A
ELURA10 A
No. D17-6512 Digital Video Camera NTSC
D17-6522
Canon Inc.
Digital Imaging Products Service Dept.
c CANON INC. 2001 First Edition : Sep. 2001
First Print : Sep. 2001
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
1. Product Overview ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
2. Product Features ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-1
2-1 Comparative List for Functions and Performance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
3. Performance / Functions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6
4. System Charts --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13
5. Viewfinder/ LCD Display Internal Display List ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-14
5-1 Camera Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-14
5-2 VCR Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-18
5-3 Card Recording Mode (MC Model Only) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-22
5-4 Card Play Mode (MC Model only) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-26
5-5 Menu Displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-28
5-6 Card Mix Screen Displays ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-35
5-7 Warning Display ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-40
6. Data Backup ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-42
6-1 Main Power Supply Backup -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-42
6-2 Backup by the Main Power Supply or Backup Power Supply (Button Type Lithium Primary Battery) ---------------- 1-42
6-3 Backup Conditions Using Switch Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-43
6-3-1 Turning OFF the Power Supply ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-43
6-3-2 Other Power Switch Positions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-44
6-3-3 Switching the Camera Mode/Switching the Program AE Mode --------------------------------------------------- 1-45
7. Others ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-46
7-1 Green Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-46
7-2 On-Screen ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-46
7-3 Headphone (with Docking Unit DU-300 Connected), Speaker --------------------------------------------------------------- 1-46
7-4 Battery Level display, Warning Displays and (Low-Power) Power Shutoff ------------------------------------------------- 1-47
7-5 System Data Display ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-47
7-6 Data Code display -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-47
7-7 MP Tape Capability ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-47
7-8 Warning Buzzer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-47
7-9 Using Analog Line, DV Recording ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-48
7-10 VIdeo ID1 Detection/Output Capability ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-48
7-11 Closed Caption Detection/Output ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-49
7-12 Audio Dubbing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-49
7-12-1 Tape Usable for Audio Dubbing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-49
7-12-2 Selecting an Audio Dubbing Signal Input Source ------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-49
7-12-3 Audio Dubbing Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-49
7-13 AV Insert ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-50
7-13-1 Tape Usable for AV Insert ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-50
7-13-2 AV Insert Operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-50
7-14 Multi-Dial ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-50
7-15 LCD Panel/CVF (Color ViewFinder) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-51
7-15-1 Camera Mode/Camera Recording Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-51
7-15-2 VCR Mode/Card Play Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-51
7-16 Memory Card System -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-51
7-16-1 Card Recording (Card Recording of Still Images) ------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-51
7-16-2 Copying [ ]/[ ] ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-52
7-16-3 Card Mix ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-53
7-16-4 Card Playback ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-53
7-16-5 Image Protecting Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-54
7-16-6 Print Mark Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-54
7-16-7 Image Erase --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-54
7-16-8 Format --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-55
7-16-9 Card Review -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-55
7-16-10 Image Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-55
7-16-11 Forward Skip for Card Playback ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-56
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1. Product Overview
Strategic product with a 3x recording mode, memory card functions and analog line input (iPAL) that are newly developed in the
camcorder industries. Also, it succeeds the super compact size of the ELURA2 MC A with more sophisticated exterior design and
enhances the picture quality.
2. Product Features
• Compact vertical (magnesium alloy) body
• 1/4-inch progressive scan 680,000-pixel CCD RGB primary color filters
• 2.5-inch 200,000-Pixel LCD monitor
• Digital input/output (DV jack), analog input/output AV insert function
• Card still image recording, multi-media card, SD memory card capability (MC model only)
• Card mix function (MC model only)
• SDL mode (max. recording time 240 min. : ELP mode using 80 min. tape)
• Multi-screen
• 3-element microphone
• Adequate accessories (New : 1 types of optical accessories, compact power supply)
• User-friendly card functions (Card preview, card playback jump functions)
1-1
External Appearance
Fig. 1-1
1-2
2-1 Comparative List for Functions and Performance
Item ELURA2 MC A, ELURA2 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A (this device)

Camera
Imaging(video) Image size 1/4-inch CCD ←
element Number of pixels Total number of pixels : 680,000 ←
Effective number of pixels : 360,000 ←
System Progressive scan ←
Filter RGB primary color filters ←
Lens Optical zoom ratio 10 × ←
Digital zoom ratio 40 × (10 × 4) ←
Focal length 3.5-35mm ←
(Converted to 35mm film) 44.7-447mm ←
F number F1.6-2.6 ←
Zoom speed Variable ←
Filter diameter 27mm ←
Minimum brightness 7.5 (3.5) lux (low-light mode NTSC: 1/30 sec) ←
Hand jitter compensation Electronic type ←
Recording function
Program AE (Full auto) ←
(Auto/Sports/Portrait/Spotlight/
Surf(sand)& snow/Low-light)
Light metering Lower center weighted Full auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, ←
system averaged metering Portrait mode, Low light mode
Evaluation metering 128 sectors ←
(spotlight mode, surf (sand) & snow mode)
Exposure AE lock ● ←
adjustment Exposure compensation ● (after AE lock) ←
AE shift × ←
Gain setting/Higher sensitivity × ←
Backlight compensation × ←
Shutter speed High-speed shutter 6 steps ←
(1/60, 1/100, 1/250,1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000)
Slow shutter 1 step (1/30 (Low-light, AE mode)) ←
Aperture Auto iris ←
Image quality Color gain adjustment × ←
adjustment Color phase adjustment × ←
(Custom preset) Sharpness adjustment × ←
Setup adjustment × ←
WB Auto ● ←
Set ● (1 pc.) ←
Preset Outdoors/indoors ←
System TTL, 128 sectors ←
Focus Mode AF/MF ←
Manual focus Multi-dial operation ←
16:9 Recording system Vertical extension system ←
Area marker display × ←
Recording D. effect Art, black & white, sepia, mosaic ←
effects D. fade White(black)auto, wipe(right & left), scroll, mosaic White(black)auto, wipe(right & left), scroll, mosaic
Multi-screen 4/9/16 screen (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
Zebra pattern × ←
1-3

Recording function
Color bar × ←
Movie Framed movie Progressive scan ←
recording Self-timer 10 sec/remote control : 2 sec ←
Interval timer × ←
Clear scan × ←
Still image Recording system Frame recording (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
recording (Field recording for card mix)
(tape) Recording time 6.5 sec. 6.5 sec. (ESP/ELP:approx. 8 sec.)
Frame processing Progressive scan ←
Still image Recording system Frame recording (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
recording Recorded image size/file system 640 (H) × 480 (V) / JPEG (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
(Card) Memory card Multi-media card Multi-media card, SD memory card
REC search ● ←
REC review ● ←
Card review × ★ (MC model only)
Standby SW × ←
Power save(after 5-min. recording pause) Power shutoff ←
Displayed character recording × ←
Audio 16 bits 2 ch (48KHz) ←
12 bits 4 ch (32KHz)(No sync 4-ch recording)
Wind cut ● ON/OFF switch (for built-in microphone only) ←
EVF Size 0.44-inch (color TFT) ←
Number of pixels 113,000 pixels ←
Brightness adjustment × ←
Color adjustment × ←
Portable × ←
Monitor LCD Size 2.5-inch ←
Number of pixels 200,000 pixels ←
Brightness adjustment × ←
Portable ● Mirror photography capability ←
VCR
Playback Frame forward play Forward/reverse ←
system Slow play Forward/reverse ←
2× speed play Forward/reverse ←
1× speed play Forward/reverse ←
Queue/review 9.5 × speed play ←
Search Photo search ● ←
Date search ● ←
Index search × ←
Play effect D. effect Art, black & white, sepia, mosaic ←
D. fade White(black)auto, wipe(right & left), scroll, mosaic ←
Multi-screen 4/9/16 screen (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
Data code display Date display/camera data ←
Slide show ● (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
Card playback jump × ★ (MC model only)
Audio dubbing ● ←
AV insert Digital ● ←
Analog ● ←
Zero set memory ● ←
1-4

VCR
Edit function Simple edit × ←
Effects × ←
Systems
I/F(jack) Microphone input ● (DC 5V jack, DU-300 capability) ←
Headphone output ● (DU-300 capability) ←
DV jack ● (input/output) ←
S jack ● (input/output, DU-300 capability) ← (input/output, DU-300 capability)
AV jack input/output RCA pin (also used for VA) ← (also used for VA)
Edit capability LANG jack (DU-300 capability) ←
World clock ● ←
Character title × ←
Speaker ● ←
Warning buzzer ● ←
Tally lamp ● ←
Remote control 1, 2 capability ←
Accessory shoe × ←
Video ID ● (ID1) ←
Recording LP ● ←
mode SDL ( E SP, E LP) × ★
Custom key × ←
Index screen key × ★ (MC model only)
Mix/slide show key × ★ (MC model only)
DV control × ←
Main unit charging × ←
Backup power supply Button type lithium battery (CR-1616 type) ←
Battery pack power supply Lithium battery, 400 series ←
Changed from D52A/B models (★ : New functions)
1-5
3. Performance / Functions
1 Type Video camcorder
2 Recording system Rotary 3-head helical scan azimuth recording.
Personal digital DVC (SD/SDL standard).
Conforms to the NTSC system (525 lines x 60 fields).
2-1 Video signal recording system Digital component recording.
SD SDL
Sampling frequency Y = 13.5MHz Y = 10.125MHz
R-Y, B-Y = 3.375MHz R-Y, B-Y = 3.375MHz
Number of quantified bits 8bits 8bits
2-2 Audio signal recording system PCM digital recording. PCM digital recording.
16-bit, 48KHz 2 channels --------
12-bit, 32KHz 2 channels 32KHz 2ch
(stereo 1, 2) (stereo1)
2-3 Tracking 2-frequency pilot type 2-frequency pilot type
2-4 Tape speed Approx. 18.81mm/sec. (SP mode) Approx. 9.41mm/sec. (ESP mode)
Approx. 12.56mm/sec. (LP mode) Approx. 6.28mm/sec. (ELP mode)
2-5 Head drum
Drum diameter 21.7mm
Speed 9000/1.001 rpm
Number of heads 3 video heads
3 Record/play times Max. 80 min. (SP mode) Max. 160 min. (ESP mode)
Max. 120 min. (LP mode) Max. 240 min. (ELP mode)
Continuous recording time BP-406 Approx. 55 min. (CVF), Approx 45 min. (LCD)
BP-412 Approx. 100 min. (CVF), Approx 80 min. (LCD)
BP-422 Approx. 200 min. (CVF), Approx 165 min. (LCD)
4 Usable video cassettes Mini-DVC specifications.
4-1 Tape type Evaporated metal tape.
4-2 Tape width 6.35mm evaporated metal tape.
4-3 Tape thickness 7µm
5 Camera
5-1 Video element 1/4 (1/4-inch) type progressive scan CCD.
5-1-1Number of pixels Total number of pixels: approx. 680,000
Effective number of pixels: approx. 360,000
5-1-2 Filters RGB primary color filters.
5-1-3 Color separation system Differential read-out type.
5-1-4 Signal configuration NTSC standard color video signal
5-1-5 Scan system 525 lines x 60 fields / 30 frames
5-2 Optical lens
5-2-1 Nominal focal length 3.5mm - 35mm
Zoom ratio Optical lens: 10× Electronic zoom: 40× (10× 4 = 40)
(Converted to 35mm film) 44.7mm - 447mm 1788mm (equivalent)
5-2-2 Nominal aperture ratio 1 : 1.6 (F2.6 at Tele photo-end)
5-2-3 Lens configuration 10 elements, 7 groups, 2 aspherical lens elements (3 surfaces) used.
5-2-4 Focusing Inner focus type. Manual focusing is also possible (by rotating the Multi dial).
5-2-5 Minimum focusing distance 10mm (autofocus at Wide). 1m (from the front of the lens) throughout the entire zoom range.
5-2-6 Power zoom Multi-step, variable speed power zoom. Slide lever type. The zoom speed is varied by the
amount of slide lever movement.
Optical zoom: approx. 2.0 sec. - approx. 21 sec.
Digital zoom: approx. 3.5 sec. - approx. 24 sec.
No manual zoom (no zoom ring).
5-2-7 Focal length indication None. There is a simple zoom display in the viewfinder.
5-2-8 Macro mechanism Wide angle end macro.
5-2-9 Minimum macro focusing distance 10mm (from front of lens).
5-2-10 Filter diameter 27mm, P0.5mm
5-2-11 Accessory lenses, filter FS-27U can be used.
5-2-12 Lens hood None.
5-2-13 Lens cap Covering type.
1-6
5-3 Hand jitter compensation Yes

5-3-1 Type Electronic type hand jitter compensaion
5-3-2 Hand jitter detection Angular velocity detecting method.
5-4 Recording modes Movie mode, photo mode (tape and card recording (card for ELURA 20 MC A only)).
5-4-1 Movie mode Normal recording and progressive scan recording.
5-4-2 Photo mode Approx. 6.5 sec. (approx, 8 sec. int the ESP mode and ELP mode) still image recording (field
recording for card mix in frame record and movie mode)
Lock display ( ) in the viewfinder after partially pressing the button. This display lights green
when the AF lock is applied.
5-4-3 Card recording CCD Prograssive still images can be recorded an still images on MMC (Multi-Media cards) or
SD (Secure Digital) memory card by pressing the Photo button int the card recording mode. A
shutter tone (pseundo) will sound at his sound at this time.
Recording system JPEG. JPEG system compressin ratio (fine/standard) available.
Conforms to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system).
Recording system JPEG system compensation ratio (irreversible) (fine/standard) available
Conforms to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system).
Number of recordable images (for SDC-8M)
Fine Approx. 50
Standard Approx. 80
The SDC-8M card supplied contains pre-recorded title images, so the above values will be
smaller when this is used. The values are merely guidelines and can vary widely depending on
the focal length used, the subject, the conditions, etc.
5-5 Exposure control
5-5-1 AE function
Program AE Full auto mode, auto mode, sports mode, portrait mode, spotlight mode,
surf (sand) & snow mode, low light mode.
5-5-2 Light metering system Below-center weighted averaging metering :
Full auto Mode, Auto Mode, Sports Mode, Portrait Mode, Low Light Mode.
Full frame averaged metering + 128-sector evaluation metering :
Spotlight Mode, Surf (Sand) & Snow Mode.
Frame division 128 sectors (16 vertical x 8 horizontal)
5-5-3 Exposure compensation function
AE lock AE lock by AE shift button operation AE lock uses the Multi-dial for Exposure compensation
(except in Full Auto mode).
Exposure Compensation volume +/−11 steps (+/−2.75EV), 0.25 aperture stop per step. Bar indicator ( ) in the
viewfinder.
5-5-4 Electronic shutter
High-speed shutter Auto mode : 1/60 sec., 1/100 sec., 1/250 sec., 1/500 sec., 1/1000 sec., 1/2000 sec.
Hand jitter compensation ON During flicker detection : 1/100 sec.
During flicker detection : 1/120 sec.
Hand jitter compensation OFF During flicker detection : 1/100 sec.
Low-speed shutter 1/30 sec. (low light mode, fixed speed)
5-6 Autofocus (AF)
5-6-1 System TTL, video signal detection auto focus type AF.
5-6-2 AF measurement area Center of screen
5-6-3 Metering frame display None.
5-6-4 AF operational range 10mm - infinity (Wide); 1m - infinity (from front of lens) throughout the entire zoom range.
5-6-5 AF operational brightness range 50 lux - 100,000 lux
5-6-6 AF mode selection Continuous AF/manual focusing. AF can be turned on and off by pressing the focus button in all
modes except full auto. (Pressing focus button)
Manual focus is displayed in the viewfinder during manual focus (AF off).
5-7 Viewfinder 0.44-inch type, color liquid crystal display (approx. 113,000 pixels), telescoping type (pull out).
Off except when the LCD monitor is stored (body side panel face) and during mirror mode.
5-7-1 Rotation No.
5-7-2 Eyepiece removal Yes.
5-7-3 Diopter adjustment range +1.5 to –5.5 diopters (eyepiece).
5-7-4 Lens configuration 2 groups, 2 elements.
1-7
5-8 LCD panel 2.5-inch type, color liquid crystals, display approx. 200,000 pixels (228 (V) × 880 (H)). TFT
active matrix drive.
RGB delta array. On except when the LCD monitor is stored (body side panel face).
Angle adjustment Yes. High angle, low angle, monitoring during mirror mode.
Data display Operation mode display, simple zoom position display, battery level display, remaining tape
display, time code, various warning. Color display. No display during mirror mode.
Relationships to the viewfinder (CVF)
*1 *1
Camera mode/card recording VCR mode/card playback
LCD panel position LCD panel CVF LCD panel CVF
Panel closed (panel side of body) OFF ON OFF ON
Panel closed (panel side outside) ON OFF ON OFF
Panel opened ON OFF ON OFF
*3 *2
Mirror (photography) mode ON ON ON ON
*1: ELURA20 MC A only

*2: Appears in Mirror mode with menu operation.
*3: Panel displays restricted to the following for Mirror mode. (Normal viewfinder and onscreen displays)
The following marks are indicated in the upper left of screen .
• Camera mode : “●” recording , “ ” recording pause,“ ”ejection
• Card recording mode : “ ” without card , “ <<<<”with card, accessing
(Mirror mode is reset in recording search and warning.)

5-9 White balance adjustment TTL, 128-sector, new white extraction type FAWB.
With set/preset (outdoors: 5,600K; indoors: 3,200K) (selection from camera menu).
Adjustment range 2,800K - 8,000K.
5-10 Digital feature function Fader, effects, multi-screen, card mix (MC model only) modes are provided.
Fader : Coupled to the start/stop button (VCR mode button), one-time execution is possible
when the fader mode is displayed (the mode display disappears when the fader ends).
Effects : Continuous effects are possible until turned off.
Multi-screen : Images are captured and displayed on several screens at fixed intervals or as
indicated manually. Displays continue until turned off.
Card mix : The sample images supplied and images recorded on cards can be mixed and
displayed with images captured with the camera.
5-10-1 Fader Audio-synchronized fader.
Auto fade (JAPAN models: White Fade; Overseas Models: Black Fade),
Wipe (Left/Right), Scroll, Mosaic Fade.
Fade time Approx. 4 sec.
5-10-2 Effects Art, Monochrome, Sepia, Mosaic.
Operated by pressing the Effects button to toggle this function ON and OFF.
5-10-3 Multi-screen
Number of screens 4 (2 × 2, 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)
Operation mode Manual, fast (every 4 fields), normal (every 6 fields), slow (every 8 fields).
5-10-4 Card mix (MC model only)
Mix type Card chroma key, Card luminance key, Camera chroma key
Mix level adjustment 32 steps.
5-10-5 Relationship between digital features and operation mode
When execution is possible in the various modes (Card record mode, card play mode. Card mix only with the MC model.)
Card record Camera mode Card playback

VCR mode
mode Still Image Movie mode
Fader × × ○ ○ ×
Effects ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
Multi-screen ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
*1
Card mix × ○ ○ × ×
*1: Not possible in the movie mode or low light mode (interlace).
1-8
5-11 Built-in microphone Stereo microphone (electret condenser microphone used).

Stereo using on-directional microphone × 3 + electrical circuit (3-element microphone).
5-11-1 Wind cut function With on/off switch (menu selection for built-in microphone only).
5-12 Additional functions
5-12-1 Time code Recording time (0:00:00 - 7:59:59) is displayed and recorded in the sub code area.
5-12-2 Data code There is no recording time display, but the recording date/time and camera data are recorded
and can be displayed during play.
Date/time Coupling range: January 1, 2001 to December 31, 2030 (initial setting: January 1, 2001).
World time capability. Automatic setting to the date/time of travel destinations by selecting the
destination city. Daylight saving time capability. Three display modes are available for play:
date, date and time, and time (January 1, 1990 to December 31, 2089).
Camera data Values such as shutter speed and aperture value are recorded (no display during recording) and
can be displayed during play.
5-12-3 Assessory shoe None.
5-12-4 Image search function Tape can be played (forward/reverse) during camera recording pause by operating the Rec Search button.
5-12-5 Rec review function Started by operating the Rec Check button ( ) during camera recording pause.
5-12-6 Card review function Yes (MC model only) The last image recorded on the memory card is read out by operating the
REC Check button ( ) on the card recording mode. The image read out can be protected or deleted.
5-12-7 Zero set memory Yes. Tape can be forwarded or rewound continuously until the zero set memory key of the WL-
D75/WL-D76 is operated (The counter value is set to 0:00:00.) (Zero set is possible only during
recording, not during play.)
5-12-8 Remote control ON/OFF Yes. Available in both the camera recording and the VCR modes (menu selection).
5-12-9 Selftimer 10 sec. (Approximately 2 sec. when the wireless controller WL-D75/WL-D76 is used.)
5-12-10 Headphone volume adjustment Adjustment is possible using the multi-dial.
6 Recorder unit
6-1 Recording functions Camera recording, DV input recording, analog input recording.
6-1-1 Recording format Personal DVC (SD specifications).
6-1-2 Tape speed
SD specifications Approx. 18.81mm/sec. (SP mode), approx. 12.56mm/sec. (LP mode)
SDL specifikations Approx. 9.41mm/sec. (ESP mode), approx 6.28mm/sec. (ELP mode)
6-1-3 DV input recording Conforms to IEEE 1394.
Records video and audio signals from a digital video camera connected with the DV cable.
6-1-4 Analog input recording The S-video jack and AV mini-jack are used to recordanalog video and audio signals.
6-1-5 Terminal priority during recording DV jack > S-video jack > AV mini-jack
6-2 Insert recording Yes.
6-2-1 Insertable tape Only tapes with SP recording can be inserted.
6-3 Dubbing Yes (SD specification tape only)
6-3-1 Tapes usable Only tapes with 12-bit SP recording other than for audio dubbing 4-channel simultaneous re-
cordings can be used for dubbing.
6-3-2 Dubbing signal input Line (AV mini-jack) or microphone (external/internal) audio signals.
6-3-3 Dubbing selection Operate the dubbing button of the remote control in play pause status.
6-4 Play functions Standard play and special play
6-4-1 Standard play
a. Video Video recorded in the SP, LP, E SP or E LP mode
b. Audio
16-bit Sampling frequency 48KHz, 44.1KHz, 32KHz. (except for SDL specifications)
12-bit Sampling frequency 32KHz.
Play using stereo 1, stereo 2 or a mix of stereo 1 and 2 (variable mix ratio).
6-4-2 Special play Video only play
a. Freeze frame play Movie picture : pure frame play
Progressive : frame play
b. Fast forward play Approx. 9.5× speed.
c. Rewind play Approx. 9.5× speed.
d. Frame forward play Forward/reverse
e. Slow play Forward/reverse 1/5× speed (corresponds to forward/reverse 1/10× speed)
f. 1× speed play Forward/reverse
g. 2× speed play Forward/reverse 2× speed
h. Edit search Forward/reverse
1-9
6-5 Tape fast forward/rewind time

Approx. 2 min. 20 sec. (using 60-minute tape)
6-6 Input signals
6-6-1 DV jack IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol SD format signal.
6-6-2 AV mini-jack
a. Video signal NTSC standard color video signal
Impedance 75 Ω
Output signal level 1Vp-p (composite)
b. Audio signal
Signal type Stereo audio signal
Impedance 47 KΩ or more
Signal level −10dBv
6-6-3 S-video jack (with Docking Unit DU-300 connected)
Signal configuration Y/C separate video signal
Impedance 75 Ω
Signal level 0.286Vp-p (composite) (color burst signal)
6-6-4 MIC jack (with docking unit DU-300 connected)
φ 3.5mm mini stereo jack
Impedance 5 KΩ or more
Signal level −57dBv (using 600ohm microphone)
6-7 Output signals
6-7-1 DV jack IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol.
6-7-2 AV mini-jack φ 3.5mm, 4-pole mini-jack.
a. Video signal
Signal configuration NTSC standard color video signal
Impedance 75 Ω
Signal level 1Vp-p (composite)
b. Audio output signal
Signal type Stereo audio signal.
AV mini-jack.
Output impedance 3 KΩ or less.
Output signal level −10dBv (47-KΩ load).
Frequency response 60Hz - 16KHz (1KHz standard: +/−3dB)
Audio signal S/N ratio
Microphone input 48dB or more.
External microphone input 48dB or more (using Docking Unit DU-300).
6-7-3 S-video jack (using Docking Unit DU-300).
Signal configuration NTSC Y/C separate video signal.
Video signal 1Vp-p (Brightness + sync signal)
Color signal 0.286Vp-p (color burst signal)
Brightness signal S/N ratio 45dB or more
6-7-4 Headphone jack (using Docking Unit DU-300).
φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack.
Output impedance 150 Ω
Output signal level −25dBv (16 Ω load, maximum volume).
6-8 Memory card system (MC model only)
6-8-1 Memory card used Multi-media card, SD memory card.
6-8-2 Recordable images and image qualities
Card record mode : Camera images can be recorded by operating the Photo button. The digital
effects function and multi-screen function can also be used.
VCR mode : Still images can be recorded by operating the Photo button (half-pressing
freezes a frame and then full-pressing records) while playing a tape. Also,
DV input images can also be recorded (no tape or tape stopped) by operat-
ing the Photo button (half-pressing freezes a frame and then full-pressing
records).
Image quality when recording from tape/DV input to a card.
1-10
Sorce Record mode Images recorded to a card

Progressive animated image
NTSC/PAL model Progressive frame image
Photo recorded on tape with ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
NTSC model Simple viewer frame
Normal animated image
PAL model Field image
NTSC model Simple viewer frame
DV input
PAL model Field image
6-8-3 Recording system JPEG file conforms to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) and DPOF (Digital Print
Order Format).
Card volume level CANON_DV
DCF folder and file name //DCIM/xxx CANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG xxx : folder number yyyy: file number
File numbers Files are controlled internally by folder number and file number. File numbers from 0001 to
9900 are allocated to recorded images. Up to 100 images can be saved in each folder. Numbers
from 100 - 998 are allocated to the folders.
Relationship between folder numbers and file numbers
Folder No. File numbers File contents

100 0001 0002 0003 ････ 0099 0100 Sample images provided at the factory
101 0101 0102 0103 ････ 0199 0200
102 0201 0202 0203 ････ 0299 0300
･･･
198 9801 9802 9803 ････ 9899 9900 Image recording area
200 0001 0002 0003 ････ 0099 0100
･･･
998 9801 9802 9803 ････ 9899 9900
Recorded images start from 101-0101. Basically, the numbers are allocated so that they are
larger than the directory numbers and file numbers of the files stored in the multi-media card.
6-8-4 Recorded image size 640 (H) × 480 (V)
6-8-5 Number of images recorded SDC-8M
Fine mode Approx. 50
Standard Approx. 80
6-8-6 Card format The Format instruction on the menu of the body is used to format cards. Correct operation
cannot be guaranteed when a personal computer is used for formatting because formatting may
vary depending on the OS.
6-9 Digital feature functions Fader, effects, multi-screen modes are provided.
Coupled to the / button. Can be executed once when Fade mode is displayed (mode display
turns OFF when fader ends).
Effects : Continuous effects are possible until turned OFF.
Multi-screen : Images are captured and displayed on several screens at fixed intervals or as
indicated manually. Displays continue until turned OFF.
6-9-1 Fader Audio-synchronized fader.
Auto fade (Japanese models : white fade; overseas models : black fade), wipe (left/right), scroll
and mosaic fade.
Fade time Approx. 4 sec.
6-9-2 Effects Art, monochrome, sepia, mosaic
Operated by pressing the D. Effect button to toggle this function on and OFF.
6-9-3 Multi-screen
Number of screens 4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)
Operation mode manual, fast (every 4 frames), normal (every 6 frames), slow (every 8 frames)
6-9-4 Card mix No
6-9-5 Relationship between digital features and operaion mode
VCR/tape VCR/card (MC model only)

Fader ○ ×
Effects ○ ×
Multi-screen ○ ×
Card mix function (MC mode only) × ×
1-11
6-10 Other functions

6-10-1 Editing mechanism Used for recording pauses and stops. Also possible when the power is turned off. This function
is not effective, when the cassette is removed.
6-10-2 Automatic stop mechanism Activates after approx. 5 min. of continuous forward still image playback or approx. 2 min. of
continuous reverse still image playback, when the condensation warning appears. when the end
or beginning of a tape is reached.
6-10-3 Automatic power off mechanism Operates when recording pause continues for approx. 5 min., and when the battery voltage
drops below the specified value.
6-10-4 Time code Automatic writing during recording. 0:00:00:00 - 7:59:59:29 (hour:minute:second:frame).
6-10-5 Photo search Used to search for photos recorded in the Photo mode.
Forward/reverse photo search (operate the , keys after selecting Photo Search with the
Search Select key of the remote control).
Setting is possible for up to +/−10 numbers from the current position.
6-10-6 Date search This function is used to specify the parts of dates that differ when recordings were made on
multiple dates.
Forward/reverse date search (operate the , keys after selecting Date Search with the
Search Select key of the remote control).
Setting is possible for up to +/−10 numbers from the current position.
6-10-7 World clock display After the reference city (the city for which the clock time has been set) has been set, the date and
time of the selected city will automatically be changed to the local date and time, and recorded
on the photo when a photo is taken.
6-10-8 Speaker Built-in. With volume adjustment.
6-10-9 Battery charge function None.
7 Terminals
7-1 DV terminal Special 4-pin connector (IEEE 1394 compatible), both input and output.
7-2 S-video terminal 4-pin mini DIN, both input and output (using Docking Unit DU-300).
7-3 Video/audio terminal φ 3.5mm, 4-pole pin jack (yellow), both input and output.
7-4 External microphone input terminal φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack (using Docking Unit DU-300).
7-5 Headphone terminal φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack (using Docking Unit DU-300).
7-6 Edit terminal φ 2.5mm mini-mini jack, LANC compatible (using Docking Unit DU-300).
7-7 Multi-media card connection terminal Special multi-pin jack (MC model only).
7-8 Battery terminal Special 4-pin jack.
8 Power supply
8-1 Input power supply 7.4VDC (battery pack), 7.2VDC (using the CA-410, CB-400).
8-2 Power consumption
Recording (Autofocus) Approx. 4.4 W (CVF), approx. 5.4 W (LCD monitor)10 Size (width × height × depth)
9 Size (W × H × D) Approx. 48 × 106 × 86 mm (approx. 1-7/8 × 4-4/8 × 3-3/8 in.) (excluding small protuberrances)
10 Mass (weight)
10-1 Weight of main unit Approx. 13 3/4 oz (390 g)
10-2 Total weight Approx. 1lb 5/8 oz (470 g)
(Including BP-406, DVM-E30, lens cap, button type lithium battery, grip belt and SDC-8M (for
MC model only))
12 Environmental conditions
12-1 Performance guarantee conditions 0°C ~ 40°C 85% (relative humidity)
12-2 Operation guarantee conditions −5°C ~ 45°C 65% (relative humidity)
1-12
4. System Charts
BP-900 Series
WL-D75/WL-D76
Lithium-ion
Wireless Controller
Battery Pack
CH-910 Dual Battery
MiniDV Charger/Holder
Video Cassette
DC-400
DC Coupler CB-400
Car Battery Adapter
ZR-1000 Zoom DU-300

Remote Controller Docking Unit
CA-400 Compact
Power Adapter
BP-406, BP-412
and BP-422
SA-1 Battery Packs
VL-10Li Adapter Bracket
Battery Video Light
DU-300 Docking Unit
BP-900 Series DU-300 TV

Lithium-ion Docking Unit S-150 S-video Cable
Battery Pack
Stereo Microphone
CA-910 Compact STV-250N Stereo Video Cable VCR
(commercially
Power Adapter available)
CV-150F DV Cable
Digital Device
PC Card Adapter*
Card Reader*
FD Adapter*
SC-1000 Soft SC-A50 Soft SD Memory Card*
Carrying Case Carrying Case or Personal Computer
MultiMediaCard*
* ELURA20 MC only
Fig. 1-2
1-13
5. Viewfinder/ LCD Display Internal Display List
5-1 Camera Mode
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Camera mode
OFF
Zoom display
(appears for approx. 4 sec.
after zoom operation)
Optical zoom W T
40× digital zoom W T
Zoom stopped W T
Zooming to Tele W T
Zooming to Wide W T
Hand jitter compensation display

Hand jitter compensation ON
Hand jitter compensation OFF No display
Recording mode display

SD mode SP recording
LP recording
SDL mode SP recording E
LP recording E
Operation mode display Mirror mode (LCD)

Recording
Recording pause
Cassette ejected
Stopped
+ Rec search
− Rec search
1-14

Program AE mode display
Full auto mode
Auto mode
Sports mode
Portrait mode
Spotlight mode
Surf & snow mode
Low-light mode
Program AE mode menu
Tape counter display

Time code (no frame display)
When indeterminate
Zero set memory M
M
When indeterminate M
EXP lock display

Minimum exposure value
Standard exposure value
Maximum exposure value

AE No display
Timer display
Remaining tape display
Tape end
When indeterminate
Tape warning display (blink)
Other No display
1-15

Focus mode display
AF off
AF on No display
Selftimer display
Timer standby
Timer operating
Other No display
Battery level Approx. 100%

Approx. 75%
Approx. 50%
Approx. 25%
Approx. 0% warning display (blink)
With power supply adapter mounted No display
Shutter speed display

1/60 sec.
1/100 sec.
1/250 sec.
1/500 sec.
1/1000 sec.
1/2000 sec.
Auto No display
Button type lithium battery low level

warning display
Remote control cord display
When cord setting 1 is selected
When cord setting 2 is selected
Remote control receptor OFF
White balance display

When set Blinks in WB setting or NG.
Indoor preset Lights up continuously after WB setting.
Outdoor preset
Auto No display
Condensation warning display (blinks) Blinks in red.
1-16

Headphone volume adjustment display
Volume OFF
OFF
Card mix display (MC model only)
Digital feature display

When auto fade is selected
When wipe is selected
When scroll is selected
When art is selected
When black & white is selected
When sepia is selected
When mosaic is selected
When multi-screen is selected
When feature off is selected No display
Window cut display

Window cut ON No display
Window cut OFF OFF External microphone connected.
Date/time display
When date and time are not set.
Audio mode display

When 16 bits is selected
When 12 bits is selected
16:9 mode display

When the 16:9 mode is selected
Other No display
Half-way press lock display

AF/AE operation (blinks)
AF/AE locked (light green)
Focus mode display

Nomal recording No display
Frame movie selected
Photo mode selected
1-17
5-2 VCR Mode

VCR Mode
OFF
Audio output display

When 12-bit stereo 1 is selected
When 12-bit stereo 2 is selected
When 12-bit mix 1:1 is selected
12-bit mix variable is selected
16-bit No display
Audio mix ratio display

When ST-1:ST-2=1:0
When ST-1:ST-2=1:1
When ST-1:ST-2=0:1
Record mode display

SD mode SP recording
LP recording
SDL mode SP recording E
LP recording E
Operation mode display

Recording
Pause
When the cassette is ejected
When stopped
Play
Fast forward
Rewind
No tape
Fast forward play
2× speed play
1× speed play
Forward slow play
(Forward slow play)
1-18

Forward frame play
Forward still play
Reverse still play
Reverse frame play
Reverse slow play
(Reverse slow play)
Reverse 1× speed play
Reverse 2× speed play
Rewind play
Forward edit search
Reverse edit search
Forward date/photo search
Reverse date/photo search
FF return
REW return
AV insert pause
AV insert record
Audio dubbing pause
Audio dubbing
Tape counter
Time code display
When no setting
Zero set memory Same as in Camera mode
Remaining tape display Same as in Camera mode.
Audio dubbing/insert or search display

When AV insert is selected
When dubbing is selected
Date search
Freeze frame photo search
Other than search No display
Battery level display Same as in camera mode.
Remote control display Same as in camera mode.
Battery warning display Same as in camera mode.
Condensation warning display Same as in camera mode.
1-19

Speaker volume adjustment display
Volume OFF
OFF
Headphone volume adjustment display Same as in Camera mode.
Data code display

Data code setting
Date and time Camera data Date and time & camera data
Date
setting
Date and time setting
Time
setting
Date &
time
setting
Camera data
Aperture value display The aperture value for this product is
F1.6 and more.
Aperture fully closed This product does not have a fully closed
When no setting aperture function.

The shutter speeds for this product are
1/30 sec., 1/60-1/2,000 sec.
When no setting
Time display
Time setting selected
When no setting
Time & time setting selected
When no setting
1-20

Day & time setting selected
When no setting
Wind cut display Same as in Camera mode.
Audio data display

When the audio dubbing/audio
input terminal selected
When the audio dubbing/microphone
input terminal is selected
Audio mode display Same as in Camera mode.
16:9 mode Same as in Camera mode.
DV input
DV input ＤＶＩＮ
Other No display
1-21
5-3 Card Recording Mode (MC Model Only)

Card recording mode
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617181920212223
0
1 M
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Zoom/exposure compensation display Same as in Camera mode.
Hand jitter compensation display Same as in Camera mode.
Card image quality display
Program AE mode display Same as in Camera mode.
Card access display
Card remaining capacity display

No card (blinks red)
frames is 9999 or more (green)
When the number of recordable

frames is 99 (green)
frames is 5 (yellow)
frames is zero (0) (red)
EXP lock display Same as in Camera mode.
Focus mode display Same as in Camera mode.
Selftimer display Same as in Camera mode.
Battery level display Same as in Camera mode.
1-22

Auto mode selected
Button type lithium battery low level Same as in Camera mode.

warning display
Remote control code display Same as in Camera mode.
White balance display Same as in Camera mode.
Battery low level warning display Same as in Camera mode.
Condensation warning display Same as in Camera mode.
Date display Same as in Camera mode.

(Date & time only)
Photo button partially pressed Same as in Camera mode.
lock display
1-23

Card review screen
Card review mode display
Card record image display Same as the card record image display in
Card record mode.
Card access display
Writing to card Red display, sequential display.
Reading from carad Green display, sequential display.
Card remaining capacity display

No card
Checking card level
No remaining capacity
99 frames remaining
1-24

Image size display Dot (horizontal)
Image protect Image protect set/cancel
Image delete mode Shift to image delete screen
Return Exit card review mode
Image protect set/cancel
Image delete screen
1-25
5-4 Card Play Mode (MC Model only)

Card Play Mode
Print mark display
Protect display
DCF file name display

Directory number 100, file number 0001
Directory number 998, file number 9900
Card access display

Writing to card
Red display
Sequential display
Reading from card
Green display
Sequential display
1-26

Image number display
No card
Checking number of cards recorded
Zero (0) card recorded
9th of 99 cards recorded
Image size Dot (Horizontal) × (Vertical)
Data display Same as in VCR mode

(Date & time only)
Slide show
Slide show operation guide display

slide show in progress
1-27
5-5 Menu Displays

Menu displays include Camera mode, VCR mode, Card recording mode and Card play mode.
Camera Mode
MAIN MENU ITEM SUB–MENU ITEM SETTING ITEM DEFAULT BACKUP
D. EFFECT D. EFFECT OFF OFF Lithium battery

FADER
EFFECT
MULTI-S
FADER FADE-T FADE-T Lithium battery
WIPE
SCROLL
EFFECT ART ART Lithium battery
BLK & WHT
SEPIA
MOSAIC
M. S. SPEED MANUAL MODERATE Lithium battery
FAST
MODERATE
SLOW
M. S. SPLIT 4 4 Lithium battery
9
16
RETURN
CARD MIX Shift the Card Mix Screen Displays
CAMERA SET UP SHUTTER AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
1/60
1/100
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
DIGITAL ZOOM ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
IMAGE S. ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
16:9 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
WHIT BAL AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
RETURN
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium battery
LP
E SP
E LP
WIND SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
AUDIO MODE *2 16 bit 12 bit Lithium battery
12 bit
RETURN
1-28
DISP. SET TP BRIGHTNESS *1 Lithium battery
MIRROR *1 ON ON Lithium battery

OFF
TV SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
D/T DISPLAY *1 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
SYSTEM WL REMOTE *2 Lithium battery
OFF
TALLY LAMP *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
BEEP *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
T. ZONE/DST *2 LONDON N.Y. Lithium battery
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H. KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL *2 JAN. 1,2001 JAN. 1,2001 Lithium battery
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
DEC.31,2001
11:59 PM
RETURN
RETURN
*1 : TALLY LAMP, BEEP, BRIGHTNESS, MIRROR and D/T DISPLAY data are displayed on the Menu screen only.
*2 : On other screens, they are displayed for 4 seconds after Power ON and Menu Exit.
D/TIME SEL is displayed only when D/T DISPLAY is OFF. WL REMOTE “OFF ( )” is always displayed.
1-29
VCR Mode
D. EFFECT D. EFFECT OFF OFF Lithium battery

EFFECT
MULTI-S
FADER FADE-T FADE-T Lithium battery
WIPE
SCROLL
MOSAIC
BLK & WHT
SEPIA
MOSAIC
FAST
MODERATE
SLOW
9
16
RETURN
LP
E SP
E LP
OUTPUT CH*1 L/R L/R Lithium battery
L/L
R/R
AUDIO DUB AUDIO IN AUDIO IN Lithium battery
MIC. IN
WIND SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
AUDIO MODE 16 bit 12 bit Lithium battery
12 bit
RETURN
CARD SET UP QUALITY FINE FINE Lithium battery
STANDARD
IMAGE NOS. *1 RESET CONTINUOUS Lithium battery
CONTINUOUS
SHTR SOUND ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
CARD OPER. COPY [ ] ] CANCEL CANCEL -----
EXECUTE
RETURN
DISP. SET UP BRIGHTNESS *1 Lithium battery
DISPLAY ON ON Lithium battery

OFF
6 SEC. DATE *1 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
DATA CODE *2 DATE/TIME DATE/TIME
CAMERA DATA Lithium battery
CAM & D/T
1-30
DISP. SET UP D/TIME SEL *2 DATE DATE & TIME Lithium battery
TIME
DATE & TIME
RETURN
SYSTEM WL. REMOTE Lithium battery
OFF
TALLY LAMP ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
OFF
REUTRN
RETURN
*1 : BRIGHTNESS, 6 SEC. DATE, OUTPUT CH and BEEP data are displayed on the Menu screen only.
*2 : On other screens, DATA CODE is displayed only when it is turned on.
1-31
Camera Recording Mode (Card/Camera Mode) (MC model only)
D. EFFECTS D. EFFECT OFF OFF Lithium battery

EFFECT
MULTI-S
BLK & WHT
SEPIA
MOSAIC
FAST
MODERATE
SLOW
9
16
RETURN
CAM. SET UP SHUTTER AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
1/60
1/100
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
D. ZOOM ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
IMAGE S. ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
WHIT BAL AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
RETURN
CARD SET UP QUALITY FINE FINE Lithium battery
STANDARD
FILE NOS. *1 RESET CONTINUOUS Lithium battery
CONTINUOUS
SHTR SOUND *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
MIRROR *1 ON ON Lithium battery

OFF
TV SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
D/T DISPLAY *1 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
SYSTEM WL REMOTE *2 Lithium battery
OFF
OFF
1-32
SYSTEM T. ZONE/DST *2 LONDON N.Y. Lithium battery

LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL *2 JAN. 1, 2001 JAN. 1, 2001 Lithium battery
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
DEC.31,2001
11:59 PM
RETURN
RETURN
*1 : BEEP, BRIGHTNESS, MIRROR, D/T DISPLAY, FILE NOS., and SHTR SOUND data are displayed on the Menu
screen only.
*2 : On other screens, they are displayed for 4 seconds after Power ON and Menu Exit.
D/TIME SEL is displayed only when D/T DISPLAY is OFF. WL REMOTE “OFF( )” is always displayed.
1-33
Card Play Mode (Card/VCR Modes) (MC Model Only)
CARD SET UP COPY [ ] CANCEL CANCEL -----

(SINGLE DISPLAY) EXECUTE
PRINT MARK Shift to Delete All Print Marks
IMAGE ERASE CANCEL CANCEL -----
SINGLE
ALL
FORMAT CANCEL CANCEL -----
EXECUTE
RETURN
CARD SET UP PROTECT Shift to Image Protect Mode.
(INDEX DISPLAY) PRINT MARK Shift to Print Mark Mode.
RETURN
LP
RETURN
DISPLAY ON ON Lithium battery

OFF
D/TIME SEL *2 DATE DATE & TIME Lithium battery
TIME
DATE & TIME
RETURN
SYSTEM WL REMOTE Lithium battery
OFF
TALLY LAMP ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
OFF
RETURN
RETURN
*1 : BRIGHTNESS, OUTPUT CH and BEEP data are displayed on the menu screen only.
*2 : On other screens, DATA CODE is displayed only when it is turned on.
1-34
5-6 Card Mix Screen Displays

Card mix selection screen
Mix key setting screen
Mix level setting screen
Slide show screen
1-35

Index screen
Image protect screen
Print mark screen
1-36

Copy screen
Copy ( ) selection screen
Copy ( ) execute screen
Copy ( ) selection screen
Copy ( ) execute screen
1-37

Image delete screen
Image delete selection screen
One image deletion
Deletion in progress warning
All images deletion
1-38

Format screen
Format confirmation screen
Format execution screen
1-39
5-7 Warning Display
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED

· Displayed when a copyright protected tape is played back.
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED

· Displayed when copyright data is detected during DV input. Also displayed when signals output from a TV set or vide are
disrupted ruing analog line input.
SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME

· Displayed when the power is turned on when the time zone, date and time have not been set.
REMOVE THE CASSETTE

· Displayed if a cassette is loaded when a mechanical error or condensation is detected.
CHECK THE DV INPUT

· Displayed when REC is pressed in a mode in which recording is possible but either DV input is not connected or, if connected
is not recognized for some reason.
CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK

· Displayed when the battery is exhausted.
CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED

· Displayed when condensation is detected (if cassette is loaded, this message will be followed by “REMOVE THE CASSETTE”).
THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

· Displayed in the VCR mode when REC is pressed in a mode in which recording is possible but the cassette is set for erase
protection.
In the Camera mode, this message is displayed when the power is turned on, when the START/STOP button is pressed and when
a cassette is loaded.
TAPE END
· Displayed when a key [FF, PLAY, etc.] that forwards the tape is pressed at the tape end or in a mode that can forward the tape
during detection.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [REC MODE]

· Displayed when the Audio Dubbing or the AV insert button is pressed in a section recorded in LP/ESP/ELP, or when the LP/
ESP/ELP modes are detected during audio dubbing or AV insert.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [AUDIO MODE]

· Displayed when the Audio Dubbing button is pressed in a section with 16-bit or 4-ch simultaneous recording. Also displayed
when the 16-bit/4-ch simultaneous recording mode is detected during audio dubbing.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [BLANK]

· Displayed when an unrecorded section is detected during audio dubbing or AV insert.
1-40
HEADS DIRTY, USE CLEANING CASSETTE

· Displayed when the head is clogged.
CARD ERROR
· Displayed when recording is not possible because of a card error. (MC model only).
CARD FULL
· Displayed when there is no available space on a card. (MC model only).
NAMING ERROR
· Displayed when the file numbers or directory numbers have reached he maximum. (MC model only).
UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE
· Displayed when an attempt is made to playback an image in a format that cannot be played back, a noncompatible JPEG image
or an image with damaged data. (MC model only).
PRINT MARK ERROR

· Displayed when there are too many (51 or more) print marks or the mark file cannot be edited. (MC model only).
NO CARD
· Displayed when there is no card in the body socket. (MC model only).
NO IMAGES
· Displayed when there are no images on a card to play back. (MC model only).
THE CARAD IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

· Displayed when an attempt is made to write to a SD card (VCR mode, card record mode) that is erase protected. (MC model
only).
** When a problem occurs, these warnings are displayed for approx. 4 sec. In the center of the screen.
** The only operation possible while a warning is being displayed is to change the mode, which causes the warning to disappear.
1-41
6. Data Backup
6-1 Main Power Supply Backup

The condensation timer is backed up only by the main power supply.
6-2 Backup by the Main Power Supply or Backup Power Supply (Button Type Lithium Primary Battery)
Items other than the menu items backed up by the main power supply or backup power supply(button type lithium primary battery).
Item Default Remarks

Digital zoom position Optical Tele
WB date(SET) -----
Date/time setting(auto date) 2001.1.1 12:00AM
Menu cursor position Uppermost position
Time code -----
Mix balance Center
Headphone volume Center
Speaker volume Center
Mechanical error ----- Reset by removing the main power supply
1-42
6-3 Backup Conditions Using Switch Operation
6-3-1 Turning OFF the Power Supply

When the camera mode is “Program AE”.
In the Full Auto mode , turn on the camera power and then follow the procedure in 6-3-3 Setting the Full Auto mode.
Item Power switch OFF/VCR

● Camera mode, Card record mode
Program AE modes Backup
Manual focus ON/OFF Backup
EXP lock ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
DE, DF ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
Headphone volume *CAM Backup
Selftimer ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
On-screen ON/OFF Backup
Zero set memory counter value *CAM Backup
● Camera, Card recording menu item setting
Digital effect selection Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM Backup *Independent
Effect Backup *independent
Multi-screen speed Backup *Independent
Multi-screen number Backup *Independent
Card mix key selection *CAM (MC model only) Backup
Card mix level *CAM (MC model only) Backup
Shutter speed setting Backup
Digital zoom setting Backup
Hand jitter compensation ON/OFF Backup
16:9 ON/OFF *CAM Backup
White balance setting Backup
Remote control code setting Backup
TALLY lamp *CAM Backup
Record mode setting *CAM Backup
Warning buzzer ON/OFF Backup
Wind cut ON/OFF Backup
Audio mode setting *CAM *SD Backup
LCD Brightness adjustment Backup
Mirror photo setting Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Backup
Day/time display Backup
Time zone/daylight saving time setting Backup
Date/time setting Backup
Image quality *CD Backup
Number reset *CD Backup
Shutter sound *CD Backup
* CAM* Camera mode only *CD : Card Record mode only (MC model only)
* Independent : The Card/camera mode, Camera mode and VCR mode are backed up independently.
* SD : SP/LO mode only.
Still image selection for card mix recording (card mix standby) is not backed up when the power is turned OFF.
1-43
6-3-2 Other Power Switch Positions
Item Power switch OFF

● VCR mode
Headphone volume Backup
Speaker volume Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
Zero set memory counter value Backup
Data code display ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
Audio 12-bit output selection Reset (to stereo 1)
Mix balance setting Backup
Search selection photo search/date search Reset (to photo search)
● VCR menu item setting
Digital effect selection Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM Backup Independent
Effect Backup *Independent
Multi-screen speed Backup *Independent
Multi-screen number Backup *Independent
Record mode setting Backup
Data code setting Backup
Date/time select setting Backup
Text display during playback ON/OFF Backup
Auto date/time display ON/OFF Backup
Bilingual setting Reset (to main + sub)
Audio dubbing input setting Backup
Wind cut ON/OFF Backup
Line in audio mode setting Backup
Warning buzzer ON/OFF Backup
Image quality (MC model only) Backup
Number reset (MC model only) Backup
● Card play mode (MC model only)
On-screen ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
Data code display ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
● Card play mode menu item setting (MC model only)
Record mode setting Backup
Data code setting Backup
Date/time selection Backup
Text display during playback Backup
Date auto display Backup
Warning buzzer Backup
1-44
6-3-3 Switching the Camera Mode/Switching the Program AE Mode
When the / switch is switched from (Program AE) to (Full Auto), and when the / switch is at , the various
items are backed up if switched to other program AE mode.
Item Full Auto Switch the Program AE mode

● Camera mode, Card recording mode (MC model only)
Program AE mode type Reset (to Auto) –––––
Autofocus ON/OFF Reset (to ON) Backup
EXP lock ON/OFF Reset (to OFF) Reset (to OFF)
DE, DF ON/OFF Reset (to OFF) Backup
Headphone volume Backup Backup
Selftimer ON/OFF Backup Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Backup Backup
Zero set memory counter value *CAM Backup Backup
● Camera mode, Card recording mode (MC model only) menu item setting
Digital effect selection Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Effect Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Multi-screen speed Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Multi-screen number Backup 'Independent Backup *Independent
Card mix selection *CAM (MC model only) Backup Backup
Card mix level *CAM (MC model only) Backup Backup
Card mix record image selection *CAM Reset Backup
(MC model only) (card mix standby)
Shutter speed Reset (to Auto) Reset (to Auto)
Digital zoom ON/OFF Backup Backup
Hand jitter compensation Reset (to ON) Backup
16:9 *CAM Reset (to OFF) Backup
White balance Reset (to Auto) Backup
Remote control code Backup Backup
Tally lamp ON/OFF *CAM Backup Backup
Record mode *CAM Backup Backup
Warning buzzer Backup Backup
Wind cut Backup Backup
Audio mode *CAM Backup Backup
LCD Brightness adjustment Backup Backup
Mirror photo setting Backup Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Backup Backup
Day/time display Backup Backup
Time zone/daylight saving time Backup Backup
Date/time setting Backup Backup
Image quality *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup
Image size *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup
Number reset *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup
Shutter sound *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup
* CAM * Camera mode only *CD : Card Record mode only (MC model only)
* Independent:The Card/camera mode, Camera mode and VCR mode are backed up independently.
• Card mix recording of still image selection(card mix standby)is not backed up in either normal or progressive.
• Backup for timer power OFF for a 5-minute record pause and for LANC power OFF is the same as for when the power switch
is turned OFF.
1-45
7. Others
7-1 Green Mode
Green Mode Default Status

• Focus --------------------------------------- Auto
• Exposure ---------------------------------- Auto
• White balance ---------------------------- Auto
• DE, DF ------------------------------------ OFF
• Hand jitter compensation --------------- ON
• Shutter ------------------------------------- Auto
• 16:9 ---------------------------------------- OFF
Other than the above, all statuses will remain the same even at the Green mode position.
Keys that are Ineffective in the Green Mode.

• Focus (Auto/Manual) button (compulsory Auto)
• Exposure (Auto/Lock) button (compulsory Auto)
• Multi-dial
• Digital effect (ON/OFF) button (compulsory OFF)
Relationship between the Program AE Mode and the Various Photo Functions
Item
Autofocus ON/OFF Compulsory ON ● ● ● ● ● ●

Shutter speed setting × ● × × × × ×
AE lock × ● ● ● × × ●
Hand jitter compensation ON/OFF Compulsory ON ● ● ● ● ● ●
White balance setting Compulsory Auto ● ● ● ● ● ●
Wind cut ON/OFF ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Digital zoom ON/OFF ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
16:9 ON/OFF Compulsory OFF ● ● ● ● ● ●
Digital fader ON/OFF × ● ● ● ● ● ●
Digital effect ON/OFF × ● ● ● ● ● ●
Multi-screen × ● ● ● ● ● ●
Photo recording (tape recording) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Progressive photo recording ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Card mix (MC model only) × ● ● ● ● ● ●
7-2 On-Screen
• On-screen can be turned on and OFF using LANC, infrared remote control or the menu.
• Text on line out will be white during on-screen (LCD panel and CVF text will be in color).
• The display defaults are ON in the Camera mode and OFF in the VCR mode.
7-3 Headphone (with Docking Unit DU-300 Connected), Speaker

• The speaker is OFF in the Camera mode.
• The speaker is ON during normal VCR mode playback and the volume can be adjusted with the Multi-dial.
• Headphone volume can be adjusted with the Multi-dial only when Headphone has been mounted.
• The speaker is turned OFF when Headphone is selected from the menu.
1-46
7-4 Battery Level display, Warning Displays and (Low-Power) Power Shutoff
Battery Level Display

• When a battery is used, the 5-step battery level display before the low power warning is displayed (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 0%
(approx.)) will be reset when the power is turned OFF. In other words, if the voltage is restored while the power is OFF, the
battery level display will show an increase when the power is again turned ON. Once the low-power display has appeared,
however, the low-power warning will not be reset, even if the voltage is restored.
• When the AC adapter is used, there is no battery level display. If the voltage should drop drastically below the warning level
warning, however, the battery level warning will appear. Also, the battery level warning will turn OFF when the battery voltage
rises above the power-OFF warning level.
7-5 System Data Display

Camera mode VCR mode
Camera screen Rec search DIF input Blue background PB (special playback)
Data code (date/time) × LANC appears × LANC appears × --- ~ --- ●
Data code (camera data) × × × F - - -, etc. × F - - -, etc. ●
Time code ● ● ● Body ● ●
Audio mode (12/16 bit) ● 4-sec. display × ● DIF × ●
Wide/normal ● Setting display × ● DIF × ●
CGMS (warning) ~ ● ● DIF × ●
SP/LP ● Setting display ● ● Setting display ● Setting display ●
* The time code display is “-: -: -: -:” for unrecorded sections and when there is no tape.
* CGMS: not output to LINE OUT and CVF (panel) when copying is prohibited.
7-6 Data Code display

Data code can be used to turn displays ON and OFF independently (without regard to other on-screen text displays.)
7-7 MP Tape Capability

LP as well as ESP and ELP recording is not possible with MP tape. Even if LP, ESP or ELP is selected from menu, the SP mode will
always be set when a tape is loaded. LP playback is possible with tapes recorded in the LP mode.
7-8 Warning Buzzer

The warning buzzer will sound melodically in the following cases.
Mode Tone color
Power on Peep
When a cassette tape whose erase protection knob is set to Save is loaded (Camera mode) Peep, peep, peep
When the EJECT cover is left open (including power off) Peep, peep
When recording starts (Camera mode) Peep
During REC PAUSE (Camera mode) Peep, peep
Photo button partially pressed OK Peep, peep
Photo REC start Peep
When condensation is detected, when a camera error occurs, and 5 sec. Beep × 5
before the REC PAUSE (*) 5-min. timer ends
When the Setting button is operated while menu selection is not possible Boop
20 sec., 15 sec., and 10 sec. before the REC PAUSE (*) 5-min. timer ends Beep, beep, beep
Seiftimer (syncs with tally blinking) Peep, peep, 1-sec. interval × 8
Peep, 0.25-sec. interval × 8
REC PAUSE (*) includes audio dubbing and AV insert REC PAUSE.
* Peep = 4KHz; beep = 2KHz; boop 1KHz
1-47
7-9 Using Analog Line, DV Recording

(1) Set the power switch to [VCR].
The Power LED (green) will light and, if a cassette is loaded, standby status will be activated. The jack (DVAS-video, AV mini)
status will be output, and headphone jack (with Docking Unit DU-300 connected) and speaker will be output (higher priority in
headphone).
(2) Connect a cable from a recording source to the S-video jack* (video signal) and AV mini jack (audio signal), or to the AV mini jack
(video and audio signals), or to the DV jack; then turn on the recording source power supply.
If the recording source is connected to multiple jacks at the same time, the recording source is automatically selected in following
jack priority.
DV Jack> S-video Jack * > AV Jack * : (with Docking Unit DU-300 connected)
During playback (including special play), the playback image will have a higher priority.
(3) On the remote control, press [REC STANDBY].
Recording pause status will be activated. In the case of analog line input, the S-video jack and AV mini jack will switch to input.
(4) To start recording, press [ / ] of the remote controller.
Recording of the video and audio from the jack selected in item (2) will start.
([ / ] toggles the record and record pause operations.)
(5) Press [■] to stop recording.
Recording will stop.
The Table below Shows the Input and Output Status for Each Mode.
DV input signal present No DV input signal present
LCD/CVF DV jack S/AV jack LCD/CVF DV jack S/AV jack
Playback
Playback screen OUT OUT Playback screen OUT OUT
(including special playback)
No tape, STOP, FF, REW DV input screen IN OUT Blue background OUT OUT
REC PAUSE/PEG DV input screen IN OUT Line input screen * IN IN
* There is no signal when there is no line input.
7-10 VIdeo ID1 Detection/Output Capability

(1) S1 signal output
When 16:9 images are output from the S-video jack in the Full (Squeeze) mode compressed to 4:3, an identification signal is output
to automatically return them to 16:9 images for wide monitors with S1 capability (when tape on which is recorded system data
related to the camera 16:9 mode or aspect ratio is played back.)
• NTSC → 16:9 full mode + 4:3 letterbox mode identification signal output
(2) Video ID1 output
When 16:9 images are output from the composite video jack in the Full (Squeeze) mode compressed to 4:3, an identification signal
is output to automatically return them to 16:9 images for wide monitors with Video ID1 capability (when tape on which is recorded
system data related to the camera 16:9 mode or aspect ratio is played back.)
(3) S1 signal and video ID1 detection with line input
When video ID1 and S1 signals superimposed over video signals from the composite video jack or S-video jack are detected, the
system data related to aspect ratio is recorded.
1-48
7-11 Closed Caption Detection/Output

(1) Closed caption signal output
• When tape on which closed caption data are recorded is played back, the closed caption data is output superimposed over the
video signal.
• The caption data can be displayed on the screen if the monitor has a built-in closed caption decoder.
(2) Closed caption signal detection
• During analog or digital line input recording, the closed caption data in the input signal is detected and the closed caption data
is then recorded.
7-12 Audio Dubbing
7-12-1 Tape Usable for Audio Dubbing

Only tapes with 12-bit SP recording other than for dubbing 4-channel simultaneous recordings can be used. If an attempt is made
to use any other tape, the Stop mode will be activated.
If the LP mode, 16-bit mode, 4-ch simultaneous recordings, unrecorded or SDL ( E SP / E LP mode) recordings are detected → Stop
(warning display).
7-12-2 Selecting an Audio Dubbing Signal Input Source

The audio dubbing input source is selected from the VCR menu.
Either of two items can be selected: Line (AV mini jack) or Mic. When Mic is selected, input will be from the external microphone
if one is connected; otherwise, input will be from the built-in microhone.
7-12-3 Audio Dubbing Operation

(1) In the VCR mode, position and pause the tape to be dubbed, then press the dubbing key of the remote control.
The dubbing mode will be activated (dubbing pause) and (dubbing pause) will appear on the LCD panel (CVF).
(2) Press the Pause key and input sound into the microphone.
Dubbing will start.
(3) Press the stop ■ key to stop.
The dubbing mode will be canceled, the dubbing display will disappear and operation will stop.
• If the pause ■ key is pressed instead of the stop key, the dubbing mode will not be canceled and status (1) (dubbing pause) will
return.
• Dubbing can also be canceled by pressing the dubbing key during dubbing pause.
• Also, if the Zero Set Memory key of the remote control is pressed at the tape position where dubbing is to be ended, operation
will automatically stop and dubbing will be canceled when that position is reached after operation (2).
1-49
7-13 AV Insert
In the AV insert mode, the audio, video and sub-code areas are overwritten, but not the ITI (Insert and Track Information) area.
7-13-1 Tape Usable for AV Insert

Only tape recorded in the SP mode can be used for AV insert. If an attempt is made to use any other tape, the Stop mode will be
activated.
If the LP mode, an unrecorded section or SDL mode is detected, operation will also stop (warning display).
7-13-2 AV Insert Operation

(1) In the VCR mode, position and pause the tape to be used for AV insert, then press the AV Insert key of the remote control.
The AV Insert mode will be activated (AV Insert Pause) and ● (AV Insert Pause) will appear on the LCD panel (CVF).
(2) Press the Pause key and input the video and audio.
AV insert will start. ● (AV Insert) will appear on the LCD panel (CVF).
(3) Press the Stop [■] key to stop.
The AV Insert mode will be canceled, the AV Insert display will disappear and operation will stop.
• If the Pause [■] key is pressed instead of the Stop key, the AV Insert mode will not be canceled and status (1) (AV Insert pause)
will return.
* AV Insert can also be canceled by pressing the AV Insert key of the remote control during AV Insert Pause.
* Also, if the Zero Set Memory key of the remote control is pressed at the tape position where AV insert is to be ended, operation will
automatically stop and AV insert will be canceled when that position is reached after operation (2).
7-14 Multi-Dial
VCR operation and various settings are performed in accordance with the body mode.
Dial Rotation
Body mode Operational function Rotating the dial upward
Using the menu Item selection The cursor moves upward
LCD Brightness adjustment Brightness adjustment The LCD screen becomes brighter
Menu
Card mix level adjustment Mix level adjustment The mix level range narrows
EXP lock EXP compensation The aperture opens
Manual focus Focus adjustment Focus shifts to close-up
VCR mode : Speaker volume adjustment The volume increases
Pushing the Dial

Body mode Operational function Dial push
Photo pause Program AE,AE menu open/close Program AE mode selection
(selection confirmation)
Digital effect Digital effect mode selection switch Digital effect mode is selected.
Menu Menu setting item switch An item is selected.
1-50
7-15 LCD Panel/CVF (Color ViewFinder)

LCD panel and CVF power supply status
7-15-1 Camera Mode/Camera Recording Mode
LCD panel layout LCD panel power supply CVF power supply
Stored (panel surface side of body) OFF ON
Stored (outside panel surface) ON OFF
Mirror mode aborted
Open ON OFF
Mirror photo status ON ON
* : Panel display is restricted (but CVF and on-screen displays are normal) in the Mirror mode. Only the following codes are displayed
in the upper left corner.
• Camera mode: only Recording ●. Recording pause , Inject display
• Card recording mode: No card , Card & access indicator <<<<
(The Mirror mode is temporarily canceled during record search and various menu settings.)
7-15-2 VCR Mode/Card Play Mode
LCD panel layout LCD panel power supply CVF power supply
Stored (panel surface side of body) OFF ON
Stored (outside panel surface) ON OFF
Open ON OFF
Mirror photo status ON OFF
7-16 Memory Card System
7-16-1 Card Recording (Card Recording of Still Images)
a. Still Recording of Camera Images
(1) Set the Power switch to Cameran, and set the Photo mode switch to or .
The Power lamp will light (red) and recording status will be activated if a card has been loaded.
(2) Frame the subject in the center of the screen from the desired angle, then partially press the [Photo] key.
“ ” will blink white, focus and AE will be locked and, when the operation of the hand jitter compensation function has been
restricted, “ ” will light green.
(3) Frame the subject and fully press the [Photo] key. “ ” will go out and the image will be recorded on the card at the instant the key
is fully pressed. During the card recording, the red access display (“>>>>”) will blink ( > → >> → >>> → >>>> → > • • •) toward
the “Card mark ”. During this time, the image being recorded will stop (freeze) on the LCP panel (or CVF) so the result can be
checked. (In the mirror photo mode, “>>>>”will blink white toward the Card mark.)
b. Card Recording of VCR Images During Playback

(1) Tape is played back using normal playback. If the [Photo] button is partially pressed during tape playback, the card data will appear
on the screen and, at the same time, Play Pause will be activated. lf the [Photo] button is now fully pressed, the still image will be
recorded on the card. The above operation can also be performed during Play Pause.
1-51
c. Card Recording of DV Input Images

(1) Set the Power switch to [VCR]. The Power lamp (green) will light and, if a cassette is loaded, standby status will be activated.
(2) Connect a cable from the recording source to the DV jack and turn on the source power supply.
(3) If the [Photo] button is pressed when there is no tape or the tape is in stop status, the card data will appear on the screen and, at the
same time, DV input will stop. If the [Photo] button is now fully pressed, the still image will be recorded on the card.
* When an image recorded in the 16:9 mode is recorded on a card, it will be recorded on the card in vertical format.
* Card recording of still image is not possible during analog line input (S-video jack, AV jack)
7-16-2 Copying [ ]/[ ]

Still image (Photo record) scenes recorded on tape are automatically searched and recorded sequentially on a card (VCR mode
copy [ ]). Still images recorded on a card can also be photo recorded sequentially as still images on tape (card play mode
copy [ ]).
a. Copy( )
Still image (Photo record) scenes recorded on tape are automatically searched and recorded sequentially on a card.
(1) Set the Power switch to [VCR].

(2) Use [FF] and [REW] keys to locate the desired start position on the tape. Move the current tape position forward of the still image
(Photo record) to be copied.
(3) Use the [Menun key to open the menu, select the “Card Execute” and “Card Execute” sub menu “Copy [ ]” and then press
the [Settings] key. Cancel/Execute will appear. To abort copying, select Cancel and press the [Settings] key.
To execute the copy, select “Execute” and press the [Settings] key.
(4) When Execute has been selected and set, the Copy Execute screen (tape data is displayed in the upper left corner and card data is
displayed in the lower right corner) will open and the copy operation will start.
During the copy operation, a still image search of the tape will be performed starting from the current tape position. The still
images discovered during the search are recorded as still images on the card. This operation will repeat until the end of the tape is
reached or the card becomes full. The copy operation can be halted at any time by pressing the Stop key [■].
b. Copy ( )
Still image scenes recorded on card are automatically recorded in sequence as still images on tape.
(1) Set the Power switch to [Card play] mode.

(2) Use the [+] and [-] keys to display the desired image (the image where copying is to start). When copying from a card to tape,
copying will proceed sequentially from the currently displayed image to the last image.
(3) Use the [Menu] key to open the menu, select the “Card Execute menu” and press the [Settings] key.
From the “Card Execute” menu, select “Copy [ ]” and then press the [Settings] key to open the Copy Execute screen,
where “Cancel/Execute” will appear. To abort copying, select “Cancel” and press the [Settings] key.
To execute the copy, select “Execute” and press the [Settings] key.
(4) When Execute has been selected and set, the Copy Execute screen (card data is displayed in the upper left corner and tape data is
displayed in the lower right corner) will open and the copy operation will start. During the copy operation, the currently displayed
still image search will be photo copied to the tape and then the next image will be displayed. This operation will repeat sequentially
until the last image has been copied or the end of the tape has been reached. The copy operation can be halted at any time by
pressing the Stop key[■].
1-52
7-16-3 Card Mix
(1) Set the Power switch to “Movie” and set the Photo mode switch to .
The Power lamp (red) will light and, if a cassette is loaded, recording pause status will be activated.
(2) Press the [Menu] key and select “ Card Mix” from the main menu.
(3) The Card Mix sub-menu will open and the still image to be recorded on the card will appear instantaneously.
Next, the card image and camera image will be mixed. The mix type, mix level and mix images can now be checked. lf the [Menu]
key is not pressed at this time to close the menu, it will not be possible to enter card mix standby status (standby status cannot be
entered unless an image has been recorded and can be played back).
When the Card [+] and [-] keys are pressed, the card still images will appear.
When Mix Type is selected and the [Settings] key is pressed, three setting items will appear: “Card chroma key”, “Card luminance
key” and “Camera chroma key”. Select the desired mix method from among these three.
Also, when “Mix Level” is selected and the [Settings] key is pressed, the slide bar [ ] will appear for setting the mix
level. When the desired mix level has been set, press the [Settings] key to establish the setting.
(4) When the [Menu] key is pressed to close the menu, the Card Mix Standby status will be activated.
(5) When the [Start/Stop] button is pressed, card mix moving images will be recorded to the cassette tape.
When the [Photo] button is pressed, card mix still images will be recorded on the cassette tape.
* Even if the above card mix settings have been made, the image selection settings and standby status will be canceled
by the following operations; therefore, it will be necessary to make the Image settings again.
• When the Power switch has been set to another mode.
• When the Photo Mode switch has been set to Green mode.
7-16-4 Card Playback
a. Normal Playback/Slide Show

(1) Set the Power switch to [Card play] mode. The Power lamp will light (green) and, if a card has been loaded and if there are images,
the last image will be displayed. If no images have been recorded, a blue background will be displayed and the warning “No
images” will be displayed for about 4 sec.
The Card [+] and [-] keys can be used to display the previous and next images. When the [+] key is pressed at the last image, the
first image will be displayed. When the [-] key is pressed at the first image, the last image will be displayed.
(2) When the [Slide Show] button is pressed a slide show will start from the currently displayed image. Each of the image will be
displayed for approx. 5 sec. and then the next image will appear. The slide show can be canceled by again pressing the [Slide
Show] button.
The [Slide Show] key is toggled on starting and ending the slide show operation.
* The last image is the image with the largest directory number and the highest image number. The first image is the
image with the smallest directory number and the smallest image number.
b. Index Screen
Six images can be displayed on one screen, making it easy to search images.
(1) Press the [Index] key to change to the Index screen. Press again to return to
the previous playback mode.
From the Index screen, the Multi-dial is used to select images (the mark
will appear on the left side of the image).
(2) A The images on the screen can be selected sequentially by operating the Multi-
dial. If the Multi-dial is again operated after the last (or first) image on the
screen has been selected, the top (or. the last) screen will be displayed auto-
matically.
Screens showing 6 images each can be selected by operating the Card [+] and [-] keys. Only one selected image can be displayed
normally by pressing the [Index] key.
1-53
7-16-5 Image Protecting Setting

It is possible to protect (erase protection) important images so they cannot be erased even if an attempt is made by mistake.
(1) Press the [Index] key to open the Index screen, and press the [Menu] key to open the Menu screen.
(2) From the “Card Execute” menu, select the “ Image Protect ” and press the [Settings] key to display the “Image Protect” screen
(one screen displays 6 images). The Multi-dial can be used to select images from the “Image Protect” screen in the same way as for
the Index screen described above. After the images have been selected, protection for the selected images can be toggled “ON/
OFF” by pressing the [Settings] key. The protect mark ( ) will be appended to identify the protected images.
7-16-6 Print Mark Setting

The print mark (DPOF mark) is a function that can be used to automatically select images for printing with a printer or by a lab.
(1) Select the “Card Execute” menu in the same way as in item (1) in image protection setting described above.
(2) From the “Card Execute” menu, select the “ Print Mark ” and press the [Settings] key to display the “Print Mark” screen (one
screen displays 6 images). The Multi-dial can be used to select images from the “Print Mark” screen in the same way as for the
Index screen described above After the images have been selected, the print mark for the selected images can be toggled “ON/OFF”
by pressing the [Settings] key. The protect mark ( ) will be appended to identify the protected images.
* Print marks can be appended to a maximum of 50 images. If an attempt is made to append the print mark to the 51st
image, a print mark error will occur and setting will not be possible.
7-16-7 Image Erase

The following method can be used to erase unwanted images.
There are two image erase methods. One method is used after card recording has ended. In the other method, only images selected
by using card review are erased while a card is still being used.
Image Erasure after Card Recording has Ended

(1) Set the Power switch to [Card play] mode. When the still images are displayed, press the [Menu] key to open the “Card play” menu
screenh and select the “Cart Executeh” sub-menu.
(2) On the “Card Execute” sub-menu, select “Image Erase”.
(3) When “Image Erase” is selected, “Cancel/Erase One Image/Erase All” will appear. Select the desired item and then press the
[Settings] key.
a) To abort image erase, select “Cancel” and press the [Settings] key.
b) To erase individual images after confirmation, select “Erase One Image” and then press the [Settings] key. When Erase One
Image is selected and set, the screen will change and the message “Erase This Image?” plus a “Yes” / ”No” box will appear. To
erase the displayed image, select “Yes” and then press the [Settings] key.
To erase a different image, use the Card [+] and [-] keys to display the image to be erased, select Yes and then press the [Settings]
key to execute the erasure. To end erasing, select No and then press the [Settings] key. The menu in upper hierarchy will return.
In the case of protected images, the Protect Mark ( ) will be displayed at the top center of the screen, “Yes” will be displayed
in purple and setting will be disabled. In order to erase a protected image, it is necessary to first return to the “Protect Setting
screen” described above
c) To erase all of the images, select “Erase All” and then press the [Settings] key and then press the Settings key. When Erase All
is selected and set, the screen will change and the message “Erase All Images?” plus a “Yes” / ”No” box will appear. To erase
all of the displayed images, select Yes and then press the [Settings] key. To abort erasing, select No and then press the [Settings]
key.
Even if an attempt is made to erase all images, protected images will not be erased.
1-54
7-16-8 Format
Format is executed for new cards, when the “Card Error” warning appears, and when all of the images and files on a card are to be
erased. Use the following method to execute Format.
(1) Select the “Card Execute” menu in the same way as in item (1) in image protection setting described above.
(2) From the “Card Execute” menu, select "Format" and then press the [Settings] key.
(3) “Cancel/Execute” box will appear. To execute formatting, select “Execute” and press the [Settings] key. To cancel formatting,
select the “Cancel” key and then press the [Settings] key.
(4) When Execute has been selected and executed, the message “Format This Card?” will appear together with a “Yes/No” box. To
continue with formatting, select “Yes” and then press the [Settings] key. To cancel formatting, select “Cancel” key and press the
[Settings] key.
* Use caution because the following images and files will be erased by formatting.
• Protected images
• Previously recorded card mix sample images
• Images and files from other equipment or PC
7-16-9 Card Review

When [– / ] key is pressed on the Card recording mode, the “Card still
image check” display will appear and the mode will be changed to the Card
Still Image Check mode. For the still images read out, the “Image Protect
” or “Delete One Image” operation is available.
To cancel the mode, select “Return” with the multi-dial.
The mode will return to ordinary mode after images are deleted.
* If the card contains no image or the card is an SD memory card pro-
tected, you can not move to the Card review mode.
7-16-10 Image Setting

If the multi-dial is pressed during card (single) playback, the mode will be changed to the Image setting mode and the “Image
Setting” display will appear. For the still images read out, the “Image Protect ”, “Print Mark Setting”, or “Delete One
Image” operation is available.
Image settings can be canceled by selecting “Return” on the multi-dial.
* If the card contains no image, you can not move to the Image setting mode.
* In the case of an SE memory card protected, the mode can be changed to the Image setting mode, but the operation
menu items above are displayed in purple and disabled.
1-55
7-16-11 Forward Skip for Card Playback

If you press and hold the card “+” (or “–”) button during card playback (single
playback), you can quickly go to the desired card image.
On the card counter display of “display no./total count”, the display no. will be
changed while you press and hold the button, and the image when you release
the button will be read out and displayed
* If the display no. exceeds the total count during card feeding, the
display no. will restart from 1.
* If the display no. gets smaller than “1”, the display no. will restart re-
versely from total count.
Card Related Cautions for All Modes

* Cautions
• When the red “>>>>” mark (this mark is white “ ” in the Mirror Photo mode/Memory mode and in the Line Out screen) is
blinking facing toward the Card mark (>>>>), this means that the card is being written, so never remove the card, disconnect the
battery pack or AC power cord at this time. Such actions can damage the images being recording (marking readout and
playback impossible) or even damage all of the images already recorded on the card.
• When the green “<<<<” mark is blinking facing away from the Card mark ( ), data is being read from the card, so the card
should never be removed at this time.
• Always turn the Power switch to the “OFF” position before inserting or ejecting a card.
1-56
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
1. P.C.B Functions -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
2. Power Supply Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
2-1 Startup of Power Supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
2-2 Power Fuses ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
2-3 Power Supply Circuit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-5
3. Signal Processing Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6
3-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6
3-2 Camera, Card Signal Processing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7
3-3 Recorder Signal Processing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
3-4 Audio Signal Flow ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10
4. System Control, Servo ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
4-1 Outline of System Control, Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
4-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-12
4-3 Servo Control ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-12
4-4 Error Detection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13
4-4-1 Error Detecting Conditions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13
4-4-2 Processing after Error Detection ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-13
4-5 IC Terminal Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-14
4-5-1 CAMERA MI-COM (IC1401) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-14
4-5-2 MAIN MI-COM (IC100) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-17
4-5-3 SUB MI-COM (IC203) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-21
CAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
1. P.C.B Functions
(1) MAIN P.C.B.
System-Control Section
• IC100 MAIN MI-COM : Servo, Video, Audio Control, System Control
• IC101 RESET : MAIN MI-COM reset
• IC200 E3V REG&RESET : E3V regulator, MODE MI-COM reset
• IC201 EEPROM : EEPROM for recorder data
• IC202 LANC INTERFACE : LANC interface
• IC203 SUB MI-COM : Power Supply Control, Clock
Camera Section
• IC1101 DIC4 : Camera digital signal processing
• IC1102 SDRAM : Memory for DIC4
• IC1104,5 AND : AND gate for control signal
• IC1106 INVERTER : Inverter amplifier for clock
• IC1301 4.0V REGULATOR : 4.0V regulator
• IC1302,3 OPE AMP : Operational amplifier for IRIS control
• IC1304 MOTOR DRIVER : AF/PZ motor drive
• IC1401 CAMERA MI-COM : AE, AWB, AF, EIS, DE control
• IC1402 RESET : CAMERA MI-COM reset
• IC1403 EEPROM : EEPROM for camera data
• IC1404 EVR (D/A CONVERTER) : (EVR)D/A converter for camera adjustment
CVF Section
• IC1501 EVR (D/A CONVERTER) : D/A converter for EVR of EVF section
• IC1502 EVF DRIVER : EVF LCD (CVF) drive
• IC1503 SWITCH : EVF display character mixing switch
Video Section
• IC2000 VRP2 : Recording/Playback head amplifier
• IC2100 VIF2 : Analog video input/output signal processing
• IC2301 VIC2 : Digital VCR signal processing LSI + SDRAM
• IC2302 AND : AND gate for control signal
• IC2600 CHARACTER GENERATOR : Character generator for LCD, EVF display
PM Section
• IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL : Power supply PWM regulator controller
• IC3202 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL : Power supply PWM regulator controller
• IC3203 4.7V REGULATOR : 4.7V regulator for video, audio, digital control
Card Section (MC model only)
• IC4000 FLASH : Memory for card firmware
• IC4001 V53 : Card control
• IC4002 SDRAM : Memory for SIC signal processing
• IC4003 SIC : Card video processing, Card interface
2-1
(2) SUB P.C.B.

Servo Section
• IC300 MOTOR DRIVE : Drum, Capstan, Loading motor drive
• FL300 5.6V REGULATOR : 5.6V regulator for motor drive
• Remote control light receptor, tally lamp
Gyro Section
• IC1601 P SENSOR GYRO : Pitch direction angular velocity detection
• IC1602 Y SENSOR GYRO : Yaw direction angular velocity detection
• IC1603 SW : Switch for gyro sensor output reset
• IC1605 OPE AMP : Operational amplifier for gyro sensor output signal
(3) CA P.C.B.
Camera Section
• IC1001 TIMING GENERATOR : Timing generator for CCD drive
• IC1003 CDS/AGC/AD : CCD output signal sampling, AGC, A/D converter
• IC1005 VCO PLL : Camera clock phase lock
• IC1007,8,9 AND : AND gate for clock voltage conversion
(4) CCD P.C.B.

• IC1000 CCD : CCD image sensor
(5) AUDIO P.C.B.

• IC701 OPE AMP : Operational amplifier for microphone
• IC801 AUDIO INTERFACE : Analog input/output signal processing
• IC802 A/D,D/A CONVERTER : Audio signal A/D,D/A conversion
(6) LCD P.C.B.

• IC901 EEPROM : EEPROM for LCD data
• IC902 LCD INTERFACE : LCD signal processing, drive
• IC4201 DC/DC CONVERTER : Backlight drive
(7) CVF P.C.B.

Signal relay from MAIN P.C.B. to CVF-LCD, Backlight LED illumination
(8) MULTI P.C.B.

Connector for Docking unit (DU-300)
(9) LI P.C.B.
Backup lithium battery terminal, Power LED, START/STOP SW
(10) MMC P.C.B.

Connector for card insertion
2-2
2. Power Supply Circuit
2-1 Startup of Power Supply
FE FPC CN11 CN14 CN1 LI P.C.B.

24 6 3 LITHIUM
LI3V
25 BATTERY
15 CN13
SW0
4
SW1 MAIN DIAL SW0 SW1 SW2
EJECT SW 17 1 MAIN CARD PLAY H H L
2
SW2 DIAL VCR L H L
OFF L H H
MMC P.C.B. MOVIE L L H
P.SCAN H L H
CARD REC H L L
1 10 8 26, 27 CN200
MAIN P.C.B.
VTR UNREG FROM

BATTERY
3 7 TP204
MAIN SW0 26
TP202
3V 8 E3V MAIN SW1 25 PM SECTION
REG.
TP203 VTR ON
DET 4 4 E3V DET MAIN SW2 24 CAM ON
3V
EJECT SW 21
SW 6 43 VCC
E3V or LI3V CASSETTE 20 FROM DMC II
IN SW
RESET 5 15 RESET L
VTR ON 48 137 CAM ON
2.6V 2 23 LI3 DET
DET. IC100
IC200 IC203 SERIAL DATA MAIN
E 3V REG. SUB MI-COM. MI-COM.
RESET
Fig. 2-1
• Lithium Battery for Backup

LI3V from the lithium battery is input at pin 3 of IC200, then output from pin 6 as power supply for the SUB MI-COM. This allows
the SUB MI-COM to provide data backup and a clock function when main power supply is not connected.
If the lithium battery voltage drops below 2.6V (or even when lithium battery is not mounted), IC200 outputs an “L” signal from
pin 2, and when power is ON, the SUB MI-COM receives the “L” signal and sends it to the MAIN MI-COM, which provides
a warning indication for the lithium battery.
• Main Power Supply

VTR UNREG from the main power supply enters pin 7 of IC200, is converted to 3V by the internal regulator, and is then output as
E3V from pin 8. The signal is also replaced with LI3V by the internal switch and then output from pin 6 as power supply to the
SUB MI-COM.
Upon receiving VTR UNREG, IC200 outputs “L” signal from pin 4. SUB MI-COM receives this and recognizes that the main
power supply is connected, then carries out initialization of the mechanisms after which it enters a standby status. In this condition,
SUB MI-COM performs detection of switches related to startup, and outputs VTR ON “H” signal from pin 48 upon detection. By
means of VTR ON signal, the recorder power supply is started up and the MAIN MI-COM is also started. If camera mode has been
selected, the MAIN MI-COM receives this signal from the SUB MI-COM and outputs CAM ON “H” signal which starts up the
camera power supply.
2-3
2-2 Power Fuses
MAIN P.C.B.
TP3201, 2
FU3201
1 2
FROM 9 14 BATT + + UNREG (VS)
BATTERY 4 3
TERMINAL 1 6 BATT − − TP3203, 4 UNREG (DC/DC)
1 2
VTR UNREG
4 3
UNREG (3V)
FU3202
Fig. 2-2
Power from the battery is divided into four systems by FU3201,2 on MAIN P.C.B.
(1) UNREG (VS) : FU3201
DRUM/CAPSTAN VS, 5V system power supply, Lens motor, Recorder motor driver, CVF backlight power supply
(2) UNREG (DC/DC) : FU3201
DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL IC power supply
(3) VTR UNREG : FU3202
1.7V system power supply, CCD -6.5V/15V, LCD12V, E3V, LANC, LCD backlight power supply
(4) UNREG (3V) : FU3202
2.3V system, 3V system power supply
2-4
2-3 Power Supply Circuit

Figure 2-3 shows the various power supply circuits.
The ON/OFF of each power supply is controlled by VTR ON output from SUB MI-COM and CAM ON output from MAIN MI-COM.
39 IC3203
UNREG (VS)
4.7V REG.
DVDD 4.7V
PWM 46 REG. 1 IN OUT 2 HA 4.7V
CH-1 Q3202
IC3201 MO 5V
DC/DC IC3219
2.8V REG.
CONVERTER
CONTROL 5 IN OUT 4 DIF 2.8V
36 ON
UNREG (3V)
1
HA3.0V, DVDD 3.0V,
PWM 50 REG. A3.0V, CARD 3.0V,
Q3216 LCD 3.0V
CH-2 Q3201, 5
CAM 3.0V
33
UNREG (3V)
CAM 2.3V
Q3227
PWM 56 REG. AVDD 2.3V, DVDD 2.3V
CH-3 Q3204
19
VTR UNREG
29 ON/OFF
PWM 57 REG. DVDD 1.7V, DIC 1.7V
30 ON/OFF
CH-4 Q3203
CAM ON
4 3
CH2 ON
CH3 ON
21
VTR ON
VTR
Q3209, 10 (1/2)
UNREG
VTR ON 6 ON/OFF
PWM 10 REG. LCD 12V
CH-1 Q3213
IC3202
DC/DC 19
CAM ON
CONVERTER VTR
Q3208, 10 (2/2)
CONTROL UNREG
PWM 11 REG. CCD 15V

CH-2 Q3212
16
VTR
UNREG
PWM 13 REG. CCD -6.5V

CH-3 Q3211, 14
Fig.2-3
2-5
3. Signal Processing Circuit
3-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit

Figure 2-4 shows the overall block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.
CCD P.C.B. CA P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B.

IC1003
IC1000 CDS IC1101 IC1102
LENS
CCD AGC DIC4 SDRAM
A/D
IC1001
TG
MC model only
IC2301
Card REC/PB
IC4003 VIC2 HEAD
MMC IC4002 SIC IC2000
P.C.B. SDRAM VRP2
JACK FPC
DV
VIDEO IC2100 IC2600

AV VIF2 CG LCD P.C.B.
IC902
LCD
AUDIO P.C.B. DRIVER
AUDIO IC1502
IC801 IC802
SDRAM EVF
AIF A/D, D/A
DRIVER
LCD
CVF
LCD
MIC
Fig. 2-4
2-6
3-2 Camera, Card Signal Processing
IC4003
CH-1 SIC A DATA
IC1003 SW TO
IC1000 CDS IC1001 IC2301
CH-2 B DATA
CCD /AGC DIC4 VIC
SW
/AD
10bit 8bit 8bit
36MHz
36MHz 27MHz 27MHz
TRANSACTION
IC1102
SDRAM
IC4001
V53
: ANALOG
IC4002
Card
SDRAM
: DIGITAL
MC model only
Fig. 2-5
(1) Camera
<CCD> IC1000
• 1/4 inch • Primary color filter
• 680,000 pixels (including electronic IS area) • All pixel readout
• Single-line double-speed readout : Readout clock is set for double speed, and both odd and even parts are read out in a single
field period (progressive mode).
<CDS/AGC/AD> IC1003
Signal read out from CCD is subjected to sample hold, AGC processing, A/D conversion, and then output as a digital signal.
<DIC4> IC1101
Carries out Y/C separation, various camera signal processing (EIS, AWB, etc.), and digital effect processing. Since, at playback,
digital effect processing is applied to the playback signal, CH-2 is for input and CH-1 for output.
<SDRAM> IC1102
Field memory for signal processing, digital effect.
(2) Card (MC model only)

<SIC> IC4003
When the card function is not operated, camera signal is sent directly to VIC2.
• Video signal capture function
• Video signal switch (card mix function)
• JPEG compression/decompression
• Image enlargement/reduction
• Card interface
<SDRAM> IC4002
Image data memory used at Card write-in, readout.
<V53> IC4001
A CPU for the card circuit, which executes firmware located in the flash memory (IC4000), communicates with the MAIN MI-
COM via SIC, and conducts various card processing through control of SIC.
2-7
Card Recording (CAMERA)

(1) DIC4 captures image initially for matching recorded image with image displayed on LCD.
(2) SIC stores image in SDRAM (IC4002).
(3) SIC applies JPEG compression to image, and starts writing into Card.
(4) VIC2 captures image and DIC4 releases the capture function.
(5) DIC4 starts camera signal processing, and provides movie image display.
(6) When SIC finishes write-in to Card, VIC2 releases the capture function.
Card Recording (VCR, DV input)

(1) VIC2 captures image.
(2) By way of SIC (B DATA) and DIC4 (CH-2), SIC again stores in SDRAM (IC4002) the image captured in SIC (CH-1).
(3) SIC applies JPEG compression to the image, and starts writing into Card.
(4) When SIC finishes write-in to Card, VIC2 releases the capture function.
(At playback/recording: Image from VIC2 appearing at LCD and video output is A DATA image via SIC, DIC4.)
(At DV input: Image from VIC2 appearing at LCD and video output is the image captured at (1).)
Card Playback
(1) SIC decompresses the Card file.
(2) SIC stores an image in SDRAM (IC4002).
(3) VIC2 captures an image (A DATA) and outputs it at LCD and video output.
Card Mixing
The selected image that has been decompressed at Card and stored in SDRAM (IC4002) is mixed with the camera image via the
switch in SIC.
In progressive mode : A DATA and B DATA are mixed with card image.
In interline movie mode : A DATA is mixed with card image.
2-8
3-3 Recorder Signal Processing
SDRAM DIF DV
SDRAM
IC1001 INTERFACE INTERFACE TERMINAL
DIC4
(ELURA10)
VIDEO
A DATA HEAD
IC4003 VIDEO COMPRESSION REC/PB IC2000
B DATA ECC
SIC INTERFACE /DEMOD. PROCESS VRP2
(ELURA20
MC)
IC802
IC2100 AUDIO
AV JACK D/A A/D BUS A/D AV JACK
VIF2 INTERFACE
S TERMINAL D/A
IC2301 VIC2
CVF IC1502
EVF R,G,B
LCD DRIVER
LCD
Fig. 2-6
< VIC2 >IC2301

• Includes an A/D converter for analog line input plus a Y/C separation filter.
• D/A output for VRP2 control is added.
• A/B DATA: input in camera mode. B DATA is output and A DATA is input at playback. (DIC4 digital effect circuit is used at
playback.)
The video data and signals input to VIC2 are subjected to digital VTR format signal processing. Audio data, subcode data and
ITI data are also created at VIC2, and these signals are output to VRP2 as 41.85 Mbps data of DV format.
• DIF : After conversion to digital data conforming to IEEE1394 standard, the data is output at DV terminal. At digital input, the
data enters VIC2 signal processing circuit via the opposite route.
< VRP2 >IC2000

• Recording data of 41.85 Mbps output from VIC2 is amplified at VRP2, and is recorded on magnetic tape while undergoing head
switching of CH-1, CH-2 with a switching pulse. At playback, the head output signal is amplified and sent to VIC2.
< VIF2 >IC2100

• Related parts are reduced in comparison to conventional VIF, and a sync separation function for analog line input is added. Y
and C signals sent from VIC2 are output as Y, C signals for S terminal (DU-300) and composite video.
At line input, input signals undergo level adjustment, sync signal separation and are output to VIC2.
< EVF DRIVER >IC1502

EVF driver, formerly mounted on CVF P.C.B., has been moved to MAIN P.C.B., and displays on CVF LCD an image based on R,
G, B and sync signals from VIC2.
2-9
3-4 Audio Signal Flow
MIC
IC701
L
C AMP
R
L L L L
R R R R IC802
IC2301 IC2000
L L L A/D
EXT. VIC2 VRP2
R R R D/A
MIC REC/PB
IC801 HEAD
L AIF
HEAD
R +
PHONE L+R SPEAKER
L SPEAKER
AV AMP -
R
JACK
BEEP LEV
BEEP 1 MAIN MI-COM

CAMERA SHUTTER BEEP
MI-COM CONT. BEEP 2
Q803, 4
Fig. 2-7
<MIC AMP> IC701

Processing is applied to output signal of microphone element C whereby it is mixed with L and R signals. The former nondirectional
microphone is thus changed to a stereo microphone having directivity
< AIF >IC801

Carries out switching between internal and external microphones (by means of serial data from MAIN MI-COM), plus ALC (Auto
Level Control), and amplification of each output signal.
Also, the shutter sound at card recording from the CAMERA MI-COM and the beep tone issued at ejection from the MAIN MI-
COM are added to the speaker output signal in AIF.
< A/D,D/A >IC802

Carries out analog - digital signal conversion. Sampling frequency is output from VIC2 and is Fs=32 KHz or Fs=48 KHz depend-
ing on the audio mode. Quantization bit number is 12 bits in case of 32 KHz or 16 bits in case of 48 KHz.
2-10
4. System Control, Servo
4-1 Outline of System Control, Servo

Figure 2-8 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is mainly
performed by the MAIN MI-COM (IC100) on MAIN P.C.B.
MC model only
CA P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. SUB P.C.B. DMC II
LENS Card
IC1001 IC300
TG MOTOR
DRIVER
DRUM
IC1003 IC3201 D-VS M
DRUM
CDS DC/DC C-VS
DRIVER
AGC CONVERTER
IC1304 FG/PG
A/D MOTOR IC4001
DRIVER V53
PWM D
PWM C
CAPSTAN
CAPSTAN M
DRIVER
DFG/PG
FG
IC1101 IC4003 IC230 CFG
DIC4 SIC VIC2
IC1404
EVR
IC1401 LOADING
ZOOM CAMERA LOADING
SW MI-COM M
IC1403 DRIVER
EEPROM
IC1501 IC1502 IC2600 IC201 IC100 MODE SW

EVR EVF CG EEPROM MAIN C.DOWN SW
DRIVER MI-COM BOT/EOT SENS.
IC901
EEPROM DEW
REEL FG
IC902
LCD
DRIVER MIC
DIAL
SW
LCD P.C.B.
IC200
VRP2
CAMERA KEY HEAD
R-KEY
AUDIO
IC2100 IC801 P.C.B.
EJECT SW AIF
IC203 VIF2
SUB
MI-COM
MAIN DIAL
MMC
IC202
MULTI P.C.B.
LANC
JACK
I/F
DOCKING UNIT
DU-300
LANC JACK
Fig. 2-8
2-11
4-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer

(1) MAIN MI-COM (IC100)
The MAIN MI-COM, as the nucleus of the system, carries out control of mode transition plus mechanism control through commu-
nication with CAMERA MI-COM. It also detects the input of various sensors and switches (DMCII). Following are the major
functions.
• VIC2 (Video IC) control/VIF2 (Video Interface) control/AIF (Audio Interface) control
• Control in accordance with IEEE1394
• Key input
• LANC communication
• LCD control
• OSD (On Screen Display) control
• DMCII mechanism control
(2) SUB MI-COM (IC203)

The SUB MI-COM is mainly in charge of the power-on sequence and charging control. Following are the major functions.
• Key input
• Remote control input
• Power ON/OFF control
• MIC (Memory In Cassette) control
(3) CAMERA MI-COM (IC1401)

Carries out lens control and camera signal processing. Following are the major functions.
• CCD drive control
• AE, AF, AWB control
• EIS (Electric Image Stabilizer) control
• Zoom key input
4-3 Servo Control

Servo control is made by the MAIN MI-COM. and VIC2 the same as heretofore. The MAIN MI-COM. controls motor ON/OFF,
turning direction, etc. and VIC2 controls the speed of revolution, phase and outputs the signal. The signal flow is such that VIC2 detects
the FG/PG, PB-RF, etc. from motor and send them to the MAIN MI-COM. The MAIN MI-COM generates the error signal and outputs
it to the VIC2 again. The VIC2 outputs the error signal (PWM), and the MAIN P.C.B. drives that signal and sends it to the motor driver
IC as a control voltage.
2-12
4-4 Error Detection

If an anomaly has been produced in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), a relevant mode enters. The LCD indicates
“Please unload the cassette” and blinks “EJECT.”
4-4-1 Error Detecting Conditions

The following table gives error detecting conditions.
Kind Condition Detection

Drum error Error detecting mode Starting / steady D-FG
FG frequency when steady 900Hz
Error detecting level Starting: Beyond 80-150%.
Steady : 30% max.
Error detecting time Starting : 5sec.
Steady : 0.5sec.
Capstan error Error detecting mode Starting / steady C-FG
FG frequency when steady 1347Hz
Error detecting level Starting : 80% max.
Steady : 100Hz max.
Error detecting time Starting : 2sec.
Steady : 0.5sec.
Reel error Error detecting mode Normal / UNLOAD T, S-REEL FG
Error detection Normally : C-FG number per reel FG cycle is C-FG
2.4×1347 or more.
UNLOAD : Reel FG half cycle is 1 sec or more
(Take-up reel only for both)
Loading error Error detecting mode M ode transfer M ode SW
Error detection M ode transfer time
STANDBY-STOP : 6sec
STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec
STOP-PLAY : 3sec
4-4-2 Processing after Error Detection

The following table gives processing after error detection.
During Loading During tape
Cassette in Loading During mode
loading completed running
Drum error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Capstan error Pop up ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Reel error ------- ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Loading error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop ------- Error stop
• Pop up : Error display→error eject → pop up →error clear

• Error stop : Error display→STOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)
2-13
4-5 IC Terminal Functions
4-5-1 CAMERA MI-COM (IC1401)
REMARKS
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTION
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
1 VCC CAM 2.3V
2 CG STB O CG strobe output (for development/plant use)
3 I ISW O Bypass capacitor charging SW (for Gyro output) 5 0 9027 5
4,5 - O Unused
6 VCCB1 CAM 3V
7 VSSB1 GND
8 ADJ SW I (Pull up) for plant adjustment 5 0 9022 0
9 ADJ CS O CS for plant adjustment 5 0 9022 1
10 NT XPL SEL I Camera microcomputer NTSC/PAL selection 5 0 9022 2
11 TG NP SEL O TG NTSC/PAL selection (connect to /NPSEL of TG) 5 0 9022 3
12 TG SEN O TG serial communication enable signal 5 0 9022 4
13 X TG RST O TG reset signal 5 0 9022 5
14 DA LOAD O D/A load pulse (to LD of MB88347L) 5 0 9022 6
15 X AGC CS O AGC chip select 5 0 9022 7
16 VCCB1 CAM 3V
17 VSSB1 GND
18 IRIS CL O Unused
19 IRIS OP O Unused
20 X IRIS GAIN O Iris gain 5 0 9023 2
21 LED RET O Lens LED illumination 5 0 9023 3
22 X F PSV O Focus power save 5 0 9023 4
23 X Z PSV O Zoom power save 5 0 9023 5
24 F RES SW I Focus reset detection (Pull Down) 5 0 9023 6
25 Z RES SW I Zoom reset detection (Pull Down) 5 0 9023 7
26 X PC CS O For AF debugging 5 0 9024 0
27 CAM DIC RST O CAM DIC RST (to MODE) 5 0 9024 1
28 X PC ACK I/O For AF debug/WB debug 5 0 9024 2
29 X DIC4 RST O Unused 5 0 9024 3
30 EEP INI I EEPROM initialization (Pull Up) 5 0 9024 4
31 X EEP CS O EEPROM chip select (to CS)(Pull Up) 5 0 9024 5
32 X EEP WP O EEPROM write protect (to WC)(Pull Up) 5 0 9024 6
33 EEP RB I EEPROM READY/BUSY (to R/B) 5 0 9024 7
34 VCCB1 CAM 3V
35 VSSB1 GND
36 CAM CS O SUB MI-COM communication CS 5 0 9025 0
37 DIC4 RST DET I From Mode DIC4 RST OUT 5 0 9025 1
38 CAM RX O SUB MI-COM send/receive discrimination signal 5 0 9025 2
39 DIC CS O DIC CS (To DIC) 5 0 9025 3
40 FIC CS O FIC CS (To DIC) 5 0 9025 4
41 PWM CS O PWM CS (To DIC) 5 0 9025 5
42 DIC READ O DIC data read (Pull Down) 5 0 9025 6
43 FID I Field index input (From DIC) 5 0 9025 7
44 TEST1 TEST OUT1
45 TEST2 TEST OUT2
46 TEST3 TEST OUT3
2-14
REMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
47 WB SET WB SET (for debug)
48 VCCB1 CAM 3V
49 - Unused
50 VSSB1 GND
51 VSS GND
52~65 - Unused
66 VCCP CAM 3V
67,8 - Unused
69 VSS GND
70,1 - Unused
72 Shutter Audio O PWM output (for shutter sound) 5 0 902B 3
73~79 - Unused
80 SCLK3 O TG/AGC/DA serial clock 5 0 902A 1
81 SDI3 I Unused
82 SDO3 O TG/AGC/DA serial data send 5 0 9029 7
83 - Unused
84 MtoC SCLK I SUB serial clock 5 0 9029 4
85 MtoC DATA I SUB serial data receive 5 0 9029 3
86 CtoM DATA O SUB serial data send 5 0 9029 2
87 - Unused
88 VCCP CAM 3V
89 VSSP GND
90,1 - Unused
92 DIC SCLK1 O DIC serial clock 5 0 9028 7
93 DtoC DATA1 I DIC serial data receive 5 0 9028 6
94 CtoD DATA1 O DIC serial data send 5 0 9028 5
95,6 - Unused
97 SCLK0 O EEPROM serial clock 5 0 9028 2
98 SDI0 I EEPROM serial data receive 5 0 9028 1
99 SDO0 O EEPROM serial data send 5 0 9028 0
100 VCC CAM 2.3V
101 VCCP CAM 3V
102 JTAG I FP (JTAG terminal)(Pull Up)
103 TDO FP (JTAG terminal)
104 TDI Pull Up (JTAG terminal)
105 TMS Pull Up (JTAG terminal)
106 TRCLK Unused
107 EVENT0 Unused
108 EVENT1 Unused
109 TCK FP (JTAG terminal)
110 TRST# Connect to reset IC output
111 VSSP GND
112 FP Pull Down (flash protect)
113 MODE2 GND
114 MODE1 GND
115 MODE0 MCU mode fixed (Pull Down)
116 FVCC CAM 2.3V (flash erase program)
117 VSS GND
118 RESET Connect to reset IC output
2-15
REMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
119 GND
120 OSCVCC CAM 2.3V (=VCC)
121 XIN Main clock input
122 OSCVSS GND
123 XOUT O Main clock output
124 PLLVCC CAM 2.3V
125 PLLCAP PLL condenser connection
126 PLLVSS Connect to GND
127,8 - Unused
129 VSSB0 GND
130 VCCB0 CAM 3V
131 CAM SS TIM2 O Slow shutter timing signal (to Mode) 5 0 9021 5
132 CAM SS TIM1 O Slow shutter timing signal (to Mode) 5 0 9021 4
133~139 - Unused
140 VCCP CAM 3V
141 VSSP GND
142 SBI I System break interrupt (Pull Down)
143 X VD I VD signal (from DIC) 5 0 902C 0
144 - Unused
145 CAM REQ I M to C mode microcomputer communication request 5 0 902C 2
(Pull Down)
146 X PC REQ I/O For AF debug/WB debug (for development)
147 ADJ REQ I For plant adjustment (Pull Down)
148,9 - Unused
150 VCC CAM 2.3V
151 VSS GND
152~156 - Unused
157 VCCP CAM 3V
158 VSSP GND
159~176 - Unused
177 XCIN CAM 2.3V
178 VSSR GND (real time clock GND)
179 XCOUT O Unused
180 VCCR CAM 3V (real time clock power supply)
181 AVREF A/D reference voltage input (connect to CAM 3V)
182 AVCC A/D power supply input (connect to CAM 3V)
183 Y GYRO I Yaw direction gyro input 5 0 32DE,32DF
184 P GYRO I Pitch direction gyro input 5 0 32E0,32E1
185,6 - Connect to GND
187 I ENC I Iris encoder AD input 5 0 2DC8,2C9H
188 ZOOM KEY I Zoom key AD input 5 0 2B95
189 TM SENS I Temperature compensation AD input (Pull Down) 5 0 3136
190 - Connect to GND
191~198 - Unused
199 AVSS Connect to GND
2-16
4-5-2 MAIN MI-COM (IC100)
REMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
1 VCC DVDD 2.2V
2 VIF CS O VIF chip select 7 2 D7 3
3 XECSV O VIC2 (VIC CS) chip select 7 2 D7 2
4 XECSI O VIC2 (DIF CS) chip select 7 2 D7 1
5 OPT CS O OPT chip select (for factory adjustment) 7 2 D7 0
6 VCCB BUS power supply = DVDD3V
7 VSSB BUS GND
8 MIRR O Panel OSD OFF during mirror mode 7 2 D2 7
9 BEEP LEVEL O Warning buzzer level control 7 2 D2 6
10 SIC RESET O SIC RESET 7 2 D2 5
11 SIC BBUSSEL O SIC B data bus input/output control 7 2 D2 4
12 SIC PSB O SIC power save 7 2 D2 3
13 MMC ON O MMC power ON/OFF control (fixed at ON) 7 2 D2 2
14 SIC CS O SIC chip select 7 2 D2 1
15 VCO HI O VRP VCO power save 7 2 D2 0
16 VCCB Bus power supply = DVDD3V
17 VSSB Bus GND
18 XRESET O VIC initial signal 7 2 D3 7
19 EADDR6 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 6
25 EADDR0 O Address bus LSB (VIC2) 7 2 D3 0
26 EDATA15 I/O Data bus MSB (VIC2) 7 2 D4 7
27 EDATA14 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 6
35 VSSB Bus GND
43 EDATA0 I/O Data bus LSB (VIC2) 7 2 D5 0
44 VIC XERD O VIC2 7 2 D6 3
45 VIC XEWR O VIC2 7 2 D6 2
46 WIDE CONT O S1 signal control output 7 2 D6 1
47 LINE IN O LINE input circuit control 7 2 D6 4
49 BCLK Check pad 7 2 D6 0
50 VSSB GND
2-17
REMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
51 VSS GND
52 CAM RX DATA I Camera communication data discrimination 7 2 DD 3
53 DIC2S FI I DIC shrink FI (not used) 7 2 DD 2
54 CAM SS TMG1 I Camera still picture control 1 input 7 2 DD 1
55 CAM SS TMG2 I Camera still picture control 2 input 7 2 DD 0
56 PHOTO SW I Memory switch full pressing detection input 7 2 DE 7
57 HALF PHOTO SW I Memory switch half pressing detection input 7 2 DE 6
58 START/STOP I Trigger switch input 7 2 DE 5
59 PAE/GREEN SW I PAE mode select switch detection input 7 2 DE 4
60 PANEL OPEN SW I Panel open switch detection input 7 2 DE 3
61 PANEL BOTTOM/TOP SW I Panel BOTTOM/TOP switch detection input 7 2 DE 2
62 CASSETTE IN SW I CASSETTE IN switch detection input 7 2 DE 1
63 REC PROOF SW I Record inhibit switch detection input 7 2 DE 0
64 DIAL CW SW I Dial detection input 7 2 DF 7
65 DIAL CCW SW I Dial detection input 7 2 DF 6
66 VCCP DVDD3V
67 AIF CS O AIF2 chip select output 7 2 DB 0
68 EXT CONT O External microphone detection output 7 2 DB 1
69 VSSP GND
70 PD DA O Audio DA power save control 7 2 DB 2
71 PD AD O Audio AD power save control 7 2 DB 3
72 A MUTE O Audio mute 7 2 DB 4
73 A EMP2 O Audio emphasis setting 7 2 DB 5
74 A EMP1 O Audio emphasis setting 7 2 DB 6
75 AUD ON O Speaker/headphones power supply control 7 2 DB 7
76 BUZZER CARRIER2 O Buzzer 2 output 7 2 DA 0
77 BUZZER CARRIER1 O Buzzer 1 output 7 2 DA 1
78 RESERVE2 I V53 firmware update status detection 7 2 DA 2
79 TEST1 For factory adjustment 7 2 DA 3
80 EVF SENS O IC chip select for EVF drive 7 2 DA 6
81 LANC IN I LANC data input 7 2 DA 7
82 LANC OUT O LANC data output 7 2 D9 0
83 EVF DA LOAD O DA converter load for EVF 7 2 D9 1
84 AIF/VIF/SUB SCK I/O Serial clock (AIF/VIF/SUB MI-COM) 7 2 D9 3
85 SUB SI I Serial bus data input (SUB MI-COM) 7 2 D9 4
86 AIF/VIF/SUB SO O Serial bus data output (AIF/VIF/SUB MI-COM) 7 2 D9 5
87 PANEL IC CS O LCD interface chip select output 7 2 D9 2
88 VCCP DVDD3V
89 VSSP GND
90 PANEL EEPROM CS O LCD EEPROM chip select output 7 2 D9 6
91 MAIN EEPROM CS O EEPROM chip select output 7 2 D9 7
92 OSD/EEPROM/DA SCK O OSDC/EEPROM/LCD EEPROM/DA/EVFIC/LCDIC 7 2 D8 0
93 EEPROM SI I Serial data input (EEPROM/LCD EEPROM) 7 2 D8 1
94 OSD/EEPROM/DA SO O OSD/EEPROM/LCD EEPROM/DA/EVFIC/LCD 7 2 D8 2
Data output
95 DIC4 CONT O DIC4 control output 7 2 D8 3
96 DIC4 CS O DIC4 chip select output 7 2 D8 4
97 CAM/DIC4/SIC SCK I Serial clock input (CAMERA MI-COM/DIC4/SIC) 7 2 D8 5
98 CAM/SIC SI I Serial data input (CAMERA MI-COM/SIC) 7 2 D8 6
99 CAM/DIC4/SIC SO O Serial clock output (CAMERA MI-COM/DIC4/SIC) 7 2 D8 7
100 VCC DVDD2.2V
101 VCCP DVDD3V
2-18
REMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
102 EMULATOR I 10K pull up (FP) emulator (for factory adjustment)
103 JTAG/EMULATOR/FLASH O FP (for factory adjustment)
104 JTAG/EMULATOR/FLASH I 10K pull up (for factory adjustment)
106 EMULATOR O FP (emulator) (for factory adjustment)
110 JTAG/EMULATOR I 10K pull down (for factory adjustment)
111 VSSP GND
112 FLASH I 10K pull down
(This terminal is open in the mask version.)
113 GND GND
114 GND GND
115 MODE 10K pull down (for factory adjustment)
116 EMULATOR/FLASH 10K pull down (for factory adjustment)
117 VSS GND
118 REST IN Reset signal input
119 VSS GND
120 OSCVCC DVDD2.3V
121 XIN I 20 MHz
122 OSCVSS GND
123 XOUT O 20 MHz
124 PLLCVCC DVDD2.3V
125 PLLCAP External capacitor for PLL is connected to this terminal
126 PLLVSS GND
127 OSDC CS O OSDC IC chip select output 7 2 D1 0
128 OSDC RESET O OSDC reset output 7 2 D1 1
129 VSSB GND
130 VCCB DVDD3V
131 - O Unused 7 2 D1 2
132 - O Unused 7 2 D1 3
133 - O Unused 7 2 D1 4
134 FCHO I Factory process mode/soft debug terminal 0 7 2 D0 0
(for factory adjustment)
135 - O Unused 7 2 D1 5
136 CAM M RST I CAMERA MI-COM reset output 7 2 D0 1
137 CAM PW ON O Camera power supply control 7 2 D1 6
138 DA CFG O DA CFG (for factory adjustment) 7 2 DA 5
139 LET CONT O S1 signal letter box output 7 2 DA 4
140 VCCP DVDD3V
141 VSSP GND
142 N.C I 7 2 E1 4
143 XINT M I VIC RP CAPTURE interrupt request input 7 2 DC 7
144 XINT D I VIC DIF interrupt request input 7 2 DC 6
145 XINT C I VIC SDRAM interrupt request input 7 2 DC 5
146 SUB REQ O Communication request input to SUB MI-COM 7 2 DC 4
147 SUB CS I Selection input from SUB MI-COM 7 2 DC 3
148 SIC REQ O Communication request to SIC 7 2 DC 2
149 RESERVE1 O V53 detects enable/disable status 7 2 DC 1
of communication with MAIN MI-COM
150 VCC DVDD2.2V
2-19
REMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
151 VSS GND
152 DIC4 VD I [Interrupt] DIC4 VD input 7 2 DC 0
153 DIC XSYSRST O DIC/FIC reset output 7 2 DD 7
154 CAM CS I [Interrupt] CAMERA MI-COM chip select input 7 2 DD 6
155 CAM PHOTO I Timing signal input for photo(Unused) 7 2 DD 5
156 CAM REQ O CAMERA MI-COM communication request output 7 2 DD 4
157 VCCP DVDD3V
158 VSSP GND
159 RESERVE3 O Unused 7 2 DF 5
160 HP DET I Headphones jack detection input 7 2 DF 4
161 EXT DET I External microphone detection input 7 2 DF 3
162 S DET I S-terminal connection detection 7 2 DF 2
163 PLUG IN I AV multi-terminal insertion detection 7 2 DF 1
164 MCLKEN I Clock enable of camera system 7 2 DF 0
165 LOAD O Loading motor control (LOAD) 7 2 E0 7
166 UNLOAD O Loading motor control (UNLOAD) 7 2 E0 6
167 ID REQ I N.C. (for development investigation) 7 2 E1 3
168 LMO CONT O Loading motor control (CONT) 7 2 E0 5
169 CAP ON O Capstan motor start/stop signal output 7 2 E0 4
170 XIDACK O N.C. (for development investigation) 7 2 E1 2
171 CAP FWD O Capstan motor rotation direction signal output 7 2 E0 3
172 TAPE LED O Tape LED illuminant control 7 2 E0 2
173 N.C O 7 2 E1 1
174 DRUM ON O Drum motor start/stop signal output 7 2 E0 1
175 SELCSLP O Drum driver control 7 2 E1 0
176 REEL LED CONT O Reel sensor LED illumination power save 7 2 E0 0
177 XCIN I 32 KHz
178 VSSR GND
179 XCOUT O 32 KHz
180 VCCR Power flag is set when VCCR decreases to 0.1 V
or less once then increases back to 1.8 V.
181 AVREF DVDD3V
182 AVCC DVDD3V
183 DEWDETECT I Dew condensation detection 7 2 C0
184 KEY AD0 I Operation key detection (STOP, REW, REC, PAUSE) 7 2 C1
185 KEY AD1 I Operation key detection (PLAY, FF, DE, ON/OFF) 7 2 C2
186 KEY AD2 I Operation key detection (MENU, EXP, FOCUS) 7 2 C3
187 KEY AD3 I Operation key detection (EXECUTE) 7 2 C4
188 KEY AD4 I Operation key detection (Unused) 7 2 C5
189 S REEL FG I S-reel FG signal input 7 2 C6
190 T REEL FG I T-reel FG signal input 7 2 C7
191 TAPE TOP AD I Tape top sensor signal input 7 2 C8
192 TAPE END AD I Tape end sensor signal input 7 2 C9
193 MSW AD I Mechanism mode detection 7 2 CA
194 RAGC I VRP AGC signal detection 7 2 CB
195 WIDE DET I S1 signal voltage detection (wide signal detection) 7 2 CC
196 MMC DET I MMC detection; “L” when card present 7 2 CD
197 CARD PRO I Unused 7 2 CE
198 CAM DIC RST I CAM DIC RST (to CAMERA) 7 2 CF
199 AVSS GND
2-20
4-5-3 SUB MI-COM (IC203)
REMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
1 SUB CS O SUB MI-COM communication enable signal 7 3 FC 4
2 RMC PULSE IN I [Interrupt] input signal from remote controller 7 3 FC 3
3 SUB REQ I [Interrupt] MAIN MI-COM communication request input 7 3 FC 2
4 E3V DETECT I [Interrupt] E3V low voltage detection input 7 3 FC 1
5 N.C O 7 3 FC 0
6 LANC PW CONT O LANC power supply control output 7 3 FA 3
7 SCLK2 O SUB MI-COM serial clock output 7 3 FA 2
8 SIN2 O SUB MI-COM serial data output 7 3 FA 1
9 SOUT2 I SUB MI-COM serial data input 7 3 FA 0
10 MIC SCL O Cassette memory communication clock output terminal 7 3 FA 3
11 MIC SDA I/O Cassette memory communication data terminal 7 3 FA 2
12 CNVSS GND
13 XCIN I Sub clock input 7 3 FA 1
14 XCOUT O Sub clock output 7 3 FA 0
15 RESET I Reset signal input
16 XIN I Main clock input
17 XOUT O Main clock output
18 VSS GND
19 DC J DET I DC jack insertion detection (Detection by voltage) 7 3 F9 7
20 CAS IN I CASSETTE IN switch detection 7 3 F9 6
21 EJECT SW I EJECT switch detection 7 3 F9 5
22 LANC ON I LANC power ON detection 7 3 F9 4
23 LI3 DET I Detected power loss of lithium battery for backup 7 3 F9 3
24 MAIN SW2 I Power swich detection 7 3 F9 2
25 MAIN SW1 I Power switch detection 7 3 F9 1
26 MAIN SW0 I Power switch detection 7 3 F9 0
27 VTR PW LED O VTR mode, POWER LED control 7 3 F8 7
28 CAM PW LED O Camera mode, POWER LED control 7 3 F8 6
29 TALLY LED O Tally LED control 7 3 F8 5
30 MIC ON O Cassette memory, power supply control 7 3 F8 4
31 EVF BL ON O 7 3 F8 3
32 N.C O 7 3 F8 2
33 N.C O Charger IC, serial data 7 3 F8 1
34 REC CTL O Recording current forcible OFF control 7 3 F8 0
35 F CH I Function check (for factory adjustment) 7 3 F7
36 SERVICE M S I Main serial is not detected. (for factory adjustment) 7 3 F6
37 MIC3 I Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 3 F5
40 - I Connect to GND 7 3 F2
41 BATT INFO AD I Battery type detection 7 3 F1
42 BATT AD I Battery low voltage detection 7 3 F0
43 VCC E3V + LI3V
44 VREF E3V
45 AVSS GND
46 LCD ON O LCD ON/OFF Control 7 3 FC 7
47 LCD BL ON O LCD backlight control 7 3 FC 6
48 VTR ON O VTR power supply control 7 3 FC 5
2-21
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
CONTENTS
1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-2 List of Supplies ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-1
2. Settings ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
2-1 Recorder Adjustment Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
2-1-1 Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
3. How to Use Service Remote Controller (DY9-1349-000) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
4. Service Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
4-1 General --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
4-2 Service Mode Indications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-4
5. Description of Service Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-5
5-1 Error Rate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-5
5-2 Mechanical Error Indications -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6
5-3 Camera Special Commands ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7
5-4 Checking the Lens Resetting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
5-5 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
5-5-1 Voltage Range for A/D Input Key ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
6. Service Hints ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
6-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-9
6-2 Current Consumption Check -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
7. Trouble Shooting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10
7-1 Power Supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10
7-2 Camera Picture Faulty --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
7-3 Faulty of Playback Picture ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
CAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools
Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks

Alignment T ape, (Color bar master/NT SC) DY9-1321-000 Recorder electrical adjustment
Alignment T ape (tracking) DY9-1345-000 Running adjustment DMC II
Cassette T orque Gauge for DV DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment DMC II
Cleaning T ape (normal) – Commercially available DMC II
DV Cleaning T ape (hard) DY9-1359-000 Head cleaning DMC II
Driver bit for tape path adjustment DY9-2053-000 T ape path adjustment DMC II
Color bar chart DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Color Viewer 5600 K for 100V DY9-2039-100 Camera electrical adjustment (JPN)
Color Viewer 5600 K for 115V DY9-2039-115 Camera electrical adjustment (USA)
Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K DY9-2040-000 Replacement
Filter, CCA W12ø46mm DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Remote Commander RM-95 DY9-1349-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment
CZ/Siemens Chart DY9-1372-000 CZ adjustment *Same chart as the
covention model's.
1-2 List of Supplies
Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks

Logenest Lambda A-74 CY9-8102-000 Lubrication Lens
Grease GE-C9 CY9-8043-000 Lubrication Lens
Grease GE-X8 CY9-8044-000 Lubrication Lens
Hanarl KS -50 DY9-3047-000 Lubrication Cover
Sponge (W × H × T : 300mm × 200mm × 6mm) DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration isolating
/sound absorbing material
Adhesive T ape, No.354E DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape
(W × L × T : 9mm × 50m × 0.15mm, UL type)
Adhesive T ape, No. 501F DY9-3034-000 General-purpose
(W × L × T : 10mm × 50m × 0.16mm, UL type) double-side-coated adhesive tape
Sheet, Shield (W × H : 250mm × 250mm) DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material
Hanarl FL-778 DY9-3026-010 Lubrication Cover
Floil C-1Z DY9-3039-000 Lubrication Cover
Dia Bond No. 1663 DY9-3009-000 Adhesive
T ape Kapton DY9-3052-000 General-purpose adhesive tape
3-1
2. Settings
Perform the AF/EIS/ CAMERA adjustments in a complete-product state.
2-1 Recorder Adjustment Setting
<Purpose>
Check of each section, tape path adjustment, and recorder electrical adjustment are made with the front, rear, left and right cover
units removed.
2-1-1 Setting
<Procedures>
1) Solder the jumper wires (×2), TP2001 (PB-RF) and TP2002 (SWP) on the MAIN P.C.B.
2) Connect the cable of the Right Cover unit with the CN102 (R-KEY) and CN3201 (power supply).
3) To turn on the power, connect the cable of the Left Cover unit with the CN200 (P-DIAL).
*Connecting the TP203 and TP204 (MAIN P.C.B.) to ground can trun on the power also.
4) Operation by a LANC Remote Controller is possible by connecting the Docking Unit (DU-300) with the Multi Connector.
5) The power is suppliable via the DC-400 or connecting the Constant Voltage Supplier with the TP3201/3202 (DC+) and the TP3203/
3204 (DC-).
V
L IC2000 IC3201
R
IC1302
MAIN P.C.B. FU3202

CN1401 FU3201
TP202 TP3201
(CAM PW SW) (DC −)
TP204 TP3202
MONITOR TV (VTR PW (DC −)
SW2) TP203 TP2002 TP2001 TP3203 TP3204
(VTR PW SW1) (SWP) (PB-RF) (DC +) (DC +)
Left Cover Unit
A/V JACK
CN102
CN200
Right
Cover Unit CN3201
Docking Unit Battery

(DU-300) Treminal
A/V JACK
Right Cover Unit

DC-400
LANC REMOTE
COMMANDER
RM-95
Fig. 3-1
3-2
3. How to Use Service Remote Controller (DY9-1349-000)

(1) Connect the LANC terminal.
(2) To set up the service mode, turn the HOLD SW to the HOLD
position. When the HOLD SW is returned to its home po- 1. HOLD SW 2. PAGE +
6
sition, the product is controlled using its own functions.
(3) LCD indications in the service mode: *:**:**
4) PAGE is indicated while the FOCUS KEY is held down. 4 5 8 7
5) BANK is indicated. 10. MODE
11. PAGE
6) MODE is indicated. SELECT
DISPLAY
WR when the BATT mark is presented. 4. BANK - 3. BANK +
7) ADDR is indicated.
12. EJECT
8) DT is indicated (hexadecimal). 9. STORE
(4) The following table shows the key functions available in 6. ADDRESS - 5. ADDRESS +
the service mode. 7. DATA +
8. DATA -
Fig. 3-2
< Key Functions in Service Mode >
No. Key name (in service mode) Function Key name (in normal state)
1 HOLD T ransition to service mode by setting to the HOLD HOLD
position
2 PAGE + PAGE is incremented by one. ST ART /ST OP
3 BANK + BANK is incremented by one. EDIT SEARCH +
4 BANK - BANK is decremented by one. EDIT SEARCH -
5 ADDRESS + ADDRESS is incremented by one. FF
6 ADDRESS - ADDRESS is decremented by one. REW
7 DAT A + DAT A is incremented by one. PLAY
8 DAT A - DAT A is decremented by one. ST OP
9 ST ORE Confirmation/writing of DAT A PAUSE
10 MODE SELECT RD/WR mode selection REC REVIEW
11 PAGE DISPLAY PAGE is indicated on LED of remote controller. FOCUS
12 EJECT EJECT operation is performed. COUNT ER RESET
3-3
4. Service Modes
4-1 General
(1) The service modes are of a command input type using LANC communication.
(2) In the command-input-type service mode, operation mode transition in the main unit can be performed using the keys equipped on
it. Also, by returning the HOLD SW to the normal mode position, the operation mode transition on the main unit can be pefrormed
with the service remote controller.
(3) In the command-input-type service mode, the mechanism error, dew, insufficiency of power and other safety detecting functions
are ineffective.
(4) In the command-input-type service mode, the LCD mirror function is ineffective.
4-2 Service Mode Indications

Shown below are the on-screen indications to be given in the service modes.
1) Indicates that the service mode is set up (“SERV”).
2) Indicates which block is subjected to the command (“MAIN”, “CAM”, “SUB” microcomputer etc.).
3) Indicates a message for a special command (“DATA”, “SUB” etc.).
4) PG : Indicates the PAGE being selected (“4” to “7”).
5) BK :Indicates the BANK being selected (“0” to “7”).
6) MD :Indicates the MODE being selected (RD/WR).
7) ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS being selected in hexadecimal (**00 to **FF, 0000 to FFFF).
8) DT : Indicates the DATA being read or set in hexadecimal (00 to FF).
9) DT : Indicates the DATA being read or set in binary (********), except for some special functions.
10) ST : Indicates the STATUS in progress (“OK”,“NG”, “BUSY” etc.).
11) Indicates an absolute track number.
12) E0 : Indicates an error rate on a track traced by the CH0 (low channel) head.
13) E1 : Indicates an error rate on a track traced by the CH1 (high channel) head.
14) Indicates a version number of the MAIN microcomputer.
15) Indicates a version number of the SUB microcomputer.
16) Indicates a version number of the CAMERA microcomputer.
17) Indicates a firmware version for Card control. (MC model only)
S ERV ( 2 )( 3 ) S TO P
1 0 : 0 0 : 00 : 00
( 11 )
PG B K MD ADDR D T S T
(4 )( 5)( 6 )( 7 )( 8 )( 10)
E 0 ( 12 ) E1 ( 13 ) ( 9 )
CD ( 17 )
MA ( 14 )
MD ( 15 )
CA ( 16 )
Fig. 3-3
3-4
5. Description of Service Modes
5-1 Error Rate
<Generals>
(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and an AUDIO error rate can be checked.
(2) Note that the error rate is worsened on occurrence of failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure
in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc.
<How to read a VIDEO error rate>

An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indi-
cated in exponential representation. Low ch. High ch.
EO 1 5 E1
Example) ‘15’ is indicated:
Error rate = 1 ×10 -5
-5
1 × 10
Fig. 3-4
<How to read an AUDIO error rate>

To read error rate of AUDIO track, follow the procedures in the Low ch. High ch.
table below. AO 2 3 A1
The number of erroneous sync block of 64-track AUDIO sync
blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits.
(FF limitation is imposed on a value exceeding 255.)
2 3 (hexadecimal)
Example) ‘23’is indicated:

Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35
In the product specifications, the error rate on both chan- ( 2 × 1 6 ) + 3 = 3 5 (decimal)

nels in self -recording LP playback is as follows :
Error rate =28H or less Fig. 3-5
(Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less)
Important
After the adjustment, set the DT to the product setting . (press STORE key at 1 of STEP 1 state.)
ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation

ERROR RAT E PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 6 4 WR --1D 00 Product setting
2) Set DT to 03. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 03 Audio error rate indication
Reference) Product setting can be selected by resetting DT to 00. T hus, the Audio+Video error rate is indicated.
3-5
5-2 Mechanical Error Indications
<Generals>
(1) When the camcorder is stopped upon detection of a mechanical error, the POWER LED indicator blinks and the message “EJECT
CASSETTE”appears on screen. At this step, the error condition can be checked in the service mode.
(2) A mechanical error indication is given in either one of the following two manners: indication of data held only by the main battery,
and indication of data backed up by the Lithium 3V. Referring to the table shown below, select an indication mode.
(3) Data backed up by the Lithium 3V can be reset at step 3.

MECH. ERROR PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 RD --01 -- Error data held only in the POWER-ON
state is indicated.
2 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 RD --02 -- Error data backed up by the EEPROM is
indicated.
3 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 WR --02 00
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Completion of backup data resetting
<Indication of error data held only by the main battery>
PG B K MD ADDR D T S T E: T A P E E N D
7 2 RD - - 01 - - B: T A P E T O P
E BDC S T L D D: D R U M E R R O R
C: C A P S T A N E R R O R
S:S-REEL ERROR
T:T-REEL ERROR
Relevant error indication is highlighted.
L:LOADING MTR ERROR
D: D E W E R R O R
Fig. 3-6
<Indication of error data backed up by Lithium 3V>
PG B K MD ADDR D T S T D: D R U M E R R O R
7 2 RD - -02 - - C: C A P S T A N E R R O R
* * DC S T L D S:S-REEL ERROR
T:T-REEL ERROR
L:LOADING MTR ERROR
Rele v a n t e rro r i n d i c a ti o n i s h i ghl i ghted. D: D E W E R R O R
Fig. 3-7
3-6
5-3 Camera Special Commands
<Generals>
(1) The camera special commands are available for operation check.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, make preparation, and then use any camera special commands as required.
(3) All the settings are reset when the STORE key is pressed in the “WR”mode at a relevant item.
Also, all commands are reset by turning the power off and on again.

CAM SPECIAL COMMAND PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
Preparation 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 33 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Completion of high address "33" setting
WB SET 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3300 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK WB is set.
WB LOCK 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3301 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK WB is locked.
WB T URBO 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3302 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK WB high-speed setting mode
WB 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3303 -- WAIT
OUT DOOR 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK Outdoor white balance mode
WB INDOOR 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3304 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK Indoor white balance mode
IRIS OPEN 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3305 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK T he iris is opened forcibly.
IRIS CLOSE 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3306 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK T he iris is closed forcibly.
AGC MAX 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3307 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK A value of AGC gain is maximized.
AGC MIN 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3308 -- WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK A value of AGC gain is minimized.
COLOR BAR 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3309 -- WAIT Output a color bar signal for DIC output.
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
White 100% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330A -- WAIT Output a white 100% signal for FIC output.
(DIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
White 50% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330B -- WAIT Output a white 50% signal for DIC output.
(DIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
White, arbitrary 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330C -- WAIT
(DIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK DIC output, white
(By charging the DT of
"PG : 5, BK : 0, AD : 2822",
the brightness can be changed arbitrary.
White 100% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330D -- WAIT Output a white 100% signal for FIC output.
(FIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
White 50% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330E -- WAIT Output a white 50% signal for FIC output.
(FIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
White, arbitrary 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330F -- WAIT
(FIC) 2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK FIC output, white
(By charging the DT of
"PG : 5, BK : 0, AD : 2822",
the brightness can be changed arbitrary.
3-7
5-4 Checking the Lens Resetting
<Generals>
(1) Setting the address according to the table below allows to check whether the lens resetting is ended or not.
(2) The 1st digit of binary number indication (Fig. 3-3 9 ) of data is for zoom, and the 2nd for focus resetting. Resetting is ended if 1
is indicated.

LENS RESET PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
PREPARAT ION 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 1 WR **00 31 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Completion of high address"31" setting
LENS RESET Set to status shown on right and 5 0 RD 313F -- WAIT
check the binary number
indication data.
5-5 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches
<Generals>
(1) In the service mode, the terminals of the MAIN and SUB microcomputer can be checked. Thereby, it is allowed to check key-
related operations and key-microcomputer connections in the product state.
(2) The addresses of the microcomputer terminals for checking are indicated in the “Remarks” column in the I/O port table (p. 2-14 to
p. 2-21). Note that since serial communication data signals are not synchronous with the LANC communication cycle (field) in the
service mode, operations related to these signals are not indicated accurately. So, use indications for these signals just as reference
data.
(3) The following explanations are provided for the data content which seem rather complicated. For other than below, use the
addresses shown in the “Remarks” column of the I/O port table.
(4) When carrying out functional checks, select the RD mode.
5-5-1 Voltage Range for A/D Input Key

(1) On the MAIN and SUB microcomputers, the terminals shown in Fig. 3-8 are A/D input ports. Key and/or mode is detected by
means of the A/D-converted voltage.
MI-COM Pin No. NAME PG BK ADDR A/D DATA(00~FF)

(00~36) (37~64) (65~87) (88~A2) (A3~BA) (BB~E3) (E4~FF)
MAIN 193 MSW AD 7 2 CA LOAD1 STBY POP UP PLAY STOP LOAD2 GAP
(00~12) (16~FF)
MAIN 183 DEW DET 7 2 C0 DEW RELEASE DEW DET
MAIN 184 KEY A/D 0 7 2 C1

(00~2C) (2D~67) (68~A7) (A8~FF)
STOP REW REC PAUSE --
MAIN 185 KEY A/D 1 7 2 C2 PLAY FF DE.ON/OFF --
MAIN 186 KEY A/D 2 7 2 C3 MENU EXP FOCOS --
MAIN 187 KEY A/D 3 7 2 C4 EXECUTE -- --
(00~33) (34~65) (66~99) (9A~FF)

SUB 41 BATT. INFO A/D 7 3 F1 Without battery -- BP-422 BP-406
SUB 42 BATT A/D 7 3 F0 Voltage of main power supply
Fig. 3-8
3-8
6. Service Hints
6-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards

The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below.
LITHIUM P.C.B.
CA P.C.B.
ZOOM SW UNIT CVF P.C.B.
CCD P.C.B.
AUDIO P.C.B.
R-KEY UNIT
MMC P.C.B.
SUB P.C.B.
MULTI P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
LCD P.C.B.
Fig.3-9
6-2 Current Consumption Check

The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status.
Measurement condition : Product status, camera auto mode(AF,IS OFF), LCD ON (0.1A each smaller in case of CVF)
Preset voltage : 7.4V
* : MC model only
POWER SW MODE Current Consumption (A) POWER SW MODE Current Consumption (A)
CAMERA REC PAUSE 0.65 VT R ST ILL 0.50
REC 0.72 FF/REW 0.70
ST OP 0.63 CUE/REV 0.61
VT R ST OP 0.46 CARD REC * 0.70
PLAY 0.57 CARD PLAY * 0.47
3-9
7. Trouble Shooting
To detect the failure part for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.
7-1 Power Supply
<Hints>
When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences.
Power source inserted→ POWER UNREG is supplied to MAIN P.C.B. → SUB microcomputer is activated.→ SUB microcomputer
activates recorder power supply.→SUB microcomputer communicates with MAIN microcomputer.→MAIN microcomputer initializes
the mechanisms.→After initialization, SUB microcomputer turns OFF recorder power supply.→ Standby mode is set.
Then, the power is turned on in the following sequences.
Power mode switch operated → After received at SUB microcomputer, VTR or CAM ON “H” signal is output. → PWM driver is
activated to turn on each power supply. → Each microcomputer (SUB, MAIN, CAMERA) is started up to carry out system control.
<Check Points>
1) Key Inputs
Check the key inputs at Power Switch in the SERVICE mode.
2) Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication
If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indi-
cated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty.
3) Error in Mechanism (P. 3-6)
If any error is occurred by mechanism trouble at initializing, the error can be detected.
At this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters “ERROR STOP” state. In this case, check the error data in the
SERVICE mode.
4) VTR ON “H” (control signal from SUB microcomputer) Outputs
Check the output of control signal by the LANC remote controller.
5) Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY P.C.B.
Check the continuations of fuses FU 3201,3202 on MAIN P.C.B. If any fuse is faulty, replace it and check the current consump-
tion.
6) Replace the MAIN P.C.B. with a service part and check the operation.
3-10
7-2 Camera Picture Faulty
<Hints>
A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below.
CCD → CA P.C.B. → MAIN P.C.B. (DIC4 → SIC → VIC2→VIF2) → JACK P.C.B.
<Check Points>
1) Lens Resetting (P. 3-8)
If the camera picture is not displayed, check it in the service mode. If NG, check the lens.
2) Blue Back Output
In the VCR mode, the blue-back signal is generated by the VIC2 mounted on the MAIN P.C.B. Therefore, if its normal output can
be confirmed, it can be judged that the signal line subsequent to the VIC2 are normal.
3) Check of white 100% or color bar (DIC 4) output (P. 3-7)
The white 100% or color bar (DIC 4) signal is generated by the DIC4 mounted on the MAIN P.C.B. In the service mode, check
whether the white 100% or corol bar signal is generated normally or not. If its output is normal, the signal line subsequent to the
DIC4 would be normal.
4) CCD Output
The CCD output signal is sampled by the CDS/AGC/AD IC. Check this signal condition.
5) Camera Special Command (P. 3-7)
Check the operations of White Balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in the SERVICE mode.
7-3 Faulty of Playback Picture
<Hints>
In DV format, the deterioration of picture quality appears on the screen as a block noise. This failure is occurred when the picture
information (in block unit) exceeds a limit of processing performance of error correction and the previous picture information is used
for compensation.
Normally, if an error rate is worsened considerably by the deterioration of tape quality or head output, the symptom appears.
For this reason, when you check the playback picture, check the error rate. To evaluate the error rate at an absolute value, use several
kinds of tapes.
<Check Points>
1) Deterioration of Tape Quality
Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on a magnetic face of tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of other unit.
2) Error Rate (P. 3-5)
Check an error rate of self-recording LP playbacked picture in the SERVICE mode.
If the result is “NG” check the following points.
3) Head Output (See the DMC II Service Manual.)
Referring to a service manual of DMC II, check the RF output level and linearity. (including a cleaning of head)
The relation between the RF envelope and the faulty symptom is as below.
· Lack of output at inlet side : abnormal sound, left part of screen has a block noise.
· Lack of output at outlet side : abnormal time code, etc., right part of screen has a block noise.
4) EQ Automatic Adjustment (P. 4-36)
Referring to the adjustment procedures, perform the EQ automatic adjustment. By this adjustment, the Playback Amplifier circuit
in theVRP2 (on the MAIN P.C.B.) and the playback RF output are matched so that the error rate is minimized automatically.
3-11
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
1. Disassembling and Reassembling ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1
1-2 Separation of Finder Unit &Rear Cover ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2
1-3 Separation of Top Cover, Mic Cover and Zoom Key Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-3
1-4 Separation of LCD Holder Cover, Front Cover Unit and Remote Control Window Cover -------------------------------- 4-4
1-5 Separation of Left Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5
1-6 Separation of Right Cover Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6
1-7 Separation of CVF Unit, Lens Ring Unit and CA P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-7
1-8 Separation of Jack Unit, Multi P.C.B., Main P.C.B., Audio P.C.B. and Mic Unit -------------------------------------------- 4-8
1-9 Separation of Lens Unit, SUB P.C.B. and Recorder Holder -------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-9
1-10 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-10
1-14 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-14
1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-15
1-16 Disassembly of LCD Unit 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-16
1-20 Disassembly of CVF Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-20
1-21 Disassembly of Lens Unit 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-21
1-22 Disassembly of Lens Unit 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-22
1-23 List of Screws Used ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-23
1-24 List of Disassembly Photos ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-24
2. Adjustment Procedures ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-26
2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-26
2-2 AF Section Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-27
2-2-1 CZ Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-27
2-2-2 Zoom Performance Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-27
2-3 IS Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-28
2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-28
2-3-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-28
2-3-3 EEPROM Writing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-28
2-4 Camera Section Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-29
2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-29
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-29
2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30
2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30
2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30
2-4-6 EEPROM Writing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-30
2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-31
2-5-1 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Automatic) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-31
2-5-2 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Manual) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-32
2-6 Recorder Section Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-34
2-6-1 Recorder Setting for Destination ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-34
2-6-2 Y LEVEL Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-34
2-6-3 C LEVEL Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-35
2-6-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-35
2-6-5 SWP Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-36
2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-36
2-6-7 EQ Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-36
2-6-8 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-37
2-7 Tape Path Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-37
1. Disassembling and Reassembling

Notes :
(1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part.
(2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure
diagram and interconnection diagram for boards.
⋅ Lateral engaging connector
(The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)
: Contacts are positioned downward. (board side)
∗ : Contacts are positioned upward.
⋅ Lengthwise engaging connector
(The instructions are given only in the boards interconnection diagram.)
Indicated by →. Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the shafts indicate the noncontacts.
(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401B (CY9-8012-000)
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart

(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart.
(2) Reassembling can be made by reversing the disassembling procedures.
: MAIN FLOW
START
: SUB FLOW
: MAIN UNIT
1-2 Finder Unit
1-2 Rear Cover 1-7 CVF Unit 1-20 CVF P.C.B.
1-3 Top Cover 1-7 Lens Ring Unit
1-3 Mic Cover 1-7 CA P.C.B 1-21 CCD P.C.B.
1-3 Zoom Key Unit 1-8 Jack Unit 1-21 CCD Unit
1-4 LCD Holder Cover 1-8 Multi P.C.B.
1-4 Front Cover Unit 1-8 Main P.C.B.
1-4 Remocon Window Cover 1-8 Audio P.C.B.
1-5 Left Cover Unit 1-12 MMC P.C.B. 1-8 Mic Unit
1-12 Main Dial Unit 1-9 Lens Unit
1-6 Right Cover Unit 1-14 LCD Unit 1-9 SUB P.C.B.
1-14 Battery Terminal 1-9 Recorder Holder

Unit
1-15 Recorder Key

Unit
4-1
1-2 Separation of Finder Unit &Rear Cover

(1) Push the Lever and detach the Finder Unit.
(2) Open the LCD Unit and Cassette Cover.
(3) Remove five screws (a × 2, b × 1, c × 1, d × 1) and detach the Rear Cover.
(4) Separate the AV cover from the Rear Cover.
< Instruction for Supply >

Finder section : Hanal FL778 (DY9-3026-000)
Shaft and spring parts: Hanal FL778 (DY9-3026-000)
Grease applying Position
Hanal
FL-778
Cassette Cover
(2) Rear Cover
(3) - b
(3) - c Finder Unit
(1)
LCD Unit
(2) (4)
Lever
(3) AV Cover
(3) - a
(3) - d (3) - a
(1)
a b c d
3mm 3mm 5.5mm 3.5mm
Silver Silver Metal
Painted Painted Silver
Painted M1.7
M1.7 M1.7 Hanal FL-778
M1.7 (Shaft and Spring)
(self tap)
Fig. 4-1
4-2
1-3 Separation of Top Cover, Mic Cover and Zoom Key Unit
(1) Remove two screws (b × 1, e × 1).
(2) Detach the Top Cover, Mic Cover and Mic Sheet.
(3) Remove CN1401 and two screws (f × 2), then detach the Zoom Key Unit.
(3) - f
Zoom Key Unit
(1) - b
Top Cover Mic Cover

(3)
Mic Sheet
(2)
(1) - e
(2)
CN1401
b e f
3mm 2.5mm 2mm
Silver Silver Metal
Painted Painted M1.4
M1.7 M1.7
Fig. 4-2
4-3
1-4 Separation of LCD Holder Cover, Front Cover Unit and Remote Control Window Cover
(1) Remove two screws (g × 2), and detach the upper and lower LCD Holder Covers and Front Cover Unit. Since the magnets are
attached to the LCD Holder Covers, be careful about the polarity when reassembling.
(2) Remove the Remote Control Window Cover.
< Note on Reassembling >

(1) When attaching the magnets on the LCD Holder Covers with an adhesive, face the red-painted sides (N) down.

Adhesion of magnet : DIA BOND No. 1663 (DY9-3009-000)
Bond applying Position

DIA BOND No,1663
LCD Holder Cover
Remote Control Window Cover
(1) - g
(1)
(2)
(1) LCD Holder Cover
Front Cover Unit Note on Reassembling (1)
g
Magnets
4mm (Face down
Silver the red-painted sides)
Painted
LCD
M1.7
(self tap) Holder Covers
Fig. 4-3
4-4
1-5 Separation of Left Cover Unit

(1) Detach the Hand Strap.
(2) Remove four screws (d × 1, j × 1, k × 2).
(3) Detach CN200, and with the Cassette Cover opened, remove the Left Cover Unit.
(2) - j
(3)
Cassette Cover
CN200
Left Cover Unit
(3)
(3)
(2) - k
(2) - k
(1)
(2) - d Hand Strap
d j k
3.5mm 3.5mm 4mm
Metal Black Metal
M1.7 M1.7 M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 4-4
4-5
1-6 Separation of Right Cover Unit

(1) Rotate the LCD Unit and detach seven screws (i × 4, l × 3).
(2) Detach connectors CN102, CN1502 and CN3201, then remove the Right Cover Unit.

(1) Secure three screws (i) in order.
(2) Be careful when wiring the FPC of CN102.
Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2)

No.3
Screw tightening
order CN102
No.2
Rest of FPC should be
inserted between the metal
plate and the P.C.B., and
not under the rubber part.
No.1
(1) - i
UL Tape
(1) - i (2)
CN102
(1) - i
(2) (1) - l
CN1502
(1) (1) - l
CN3201
(1) - l
LCD Unit
(2)
Right Cover Unit

(1) - i
i l
2.5mm 3mm
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
Fig. 4-5
4-6
1-7 Separation of CVF Unit, Lens Ring Unit and CA P.C.B.

(1) Peel off the cushions, let the Mic Unit float above the CVF Unit, then remove two screws (h × 1, m × 1) and CN1501, and detach
the CVF Unit.
(2) Detach two screws (n × 2) and remove the Lens Ring Unit.
(3) Remove CN1402, and while detaching CN1000 and CN1001 (B to B), remove the CA P.C.B.

(1) Be sure to attach the Cushions on the specified positions.
Lens Ring Unit

(2) - n
CN1402
Mic Unit
(3) (1)
(1) (2)
(2) - n
CN1501
(1)
CA P.C.B. Cushion
(1) (3)
(1)
Cushion
CN1001
(B to B)
CN1000
(1) - m (B to B)
(1) - h
CVF Unit
h
Note on Reassembling (1) Align the corners. 2.5mm
(adjust so that upper end of cushion falls into
Metal
Align with the ridge line. the space, and is not placed on the CVF plate).
M1.7
Left reference
m
4.5mm
Metal
M1.4
Cushion Cushion Fold the surplus part

n
toward the inside. 1.3mm
Align the lower end with the lower edge Black
of metallic plate of the lens. M1.4
Fig. 4-6
4-7
1-8 Separation of Jack Unit, Multi P.C.B., Main P.C.B., Audio P.C.B. and Mic Unit
(1) Detach two screws (h × 2) and CN3302 and CN93, then detach the Jack Unit.
(2) Detach two screws (h × 1, i × 1) and CN92, then remove the Multi P.C.B.
(3) Remove three screws (h × 3) and CN304, CN1301 (B to B), CN2000 and UL tape, and detach the Main P.C.B, Audio P.C.B. and
Mic Unit together.
(4) Remove CN601 and CN3301 (B to B), and separate the Audio P.C.B. and Mic Unit from the Main P.C.B.
Main P.C.B.
UL Tape
Mic Unit
Audio P.C.B.
Audio P.C.B. CN1301 (B to B)
(3) (3)
UL Tape
(4)
CN3301
(B to B)
(3) - h
CN304
CN601 CN3302
(1)
(B to B)
(3)
(2) - i
(1)
(3)
(2) (1)
(1) - h
(3) - h CN92
CN2000
(2)
h i Main P.C.B.
2.5mm 2.5mm
Multi P.C.B. (2) - h (1) - h
Metal Metal (3) - h
M1.7 M1.7 CN93 Jack Unit
Fig. 4-7
4-8
1-9 Separation of Lens Unit, SUB P.C.B. and Recorder Holder

(1) Detach two screws (m × 2) then remove the Lens Unit and Lens Sheet.
(2) Detach two screws (h × 2) and CN300, CN301, CN302, CN303, and remove the SUB P.C.B.
(3) Detach three screws (p × 2, q × 1) and the Spring, then remove the Recorder Holder.
Note : Be sure to face downward the cassette compartment side of the DMCII mechanism unit, from which the
recorder holder has been detached. (Facing the gear at the rear of main chassis downward may result in
damage to it.)

(1) When attaching the Recorder Holder, note that there should be Rubber pieces at five locations.
(2) Before using the Insulation Rubber of service parts, coat the entire surface with Hanal KS-50M (DY9-3047-000).
Lens Unit
(3)
Recorder Holder
(1) Rubber
UL Tape (1) - m
UL Tape
UL Tape
(3) - p
Lens Sheet
Rubber
Rubber (1) - m
(2) - h
Rubber
(2)
(2) - h
h m p q SUB P.C.B. Spring (3) - q (3) - p
2.5mm 4.5mm 3.5mm 3mm
Metal Metal Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.4 M1.4 M1.4
Note on Reassembling (1) (2)
CN302
SUB P.C.B.
(2)
CN303
CN301
Set the side of cassette CN300

compartment downward.
Fig. 4-8
4-9
1-10 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 1

(1) Open the MMC Cover, detach four screws (i × 1, r × 1, s × 2) and remove the C Cover.
(2) Remove one screw (t × 1) then detach Spring Plate, Dial Plate and Switch Knob.
(3) Remove two screws (d × 1, u × 1) and detach MMC Cover Unit. (ELURA20 MC A) or SD Cover Holder (ELURA10 A)

(1) Secure the screws of C Cover in order.

Spring Plate : Hanal KS-50

Hanal KS-50
Dial Plate
Spring (1) - r
Plate
(1) - i
(2) - t
(3)
(2)
(3) - u
(2)
Double-side
adhesive tape
(3)
(3) - u C Cover
(1) MMC Cover

Unit Switch Knob
(3) - d
(ELURA20 MC A)
SD Cover (1) - s
Holder
(3) - d
Note on Reassembling (1) No.2
(ELURA10 A)
Screw tightening No.3

d i r Order
3.5mm 2.5mm 1.8mm
Metal Metal
Metal
M1.7 M1.7
M1.7
s t u
3mm 2.8mm 2mm
Metal Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.4 M1.7
(self tap) No.1
No.1
Fig. 4-9
4-10

(1) Remove the Hand Strap.
(2) Detach six screws (u × 2, v × 1, w × 1, h × 2) and CN14, then remove the Cassette Rear Cover.
(2) - w
Cassette Rear Cover

(2) h
2.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(2) - u
u
(2) 2mm
Metal
CN14 M1.7
v
(2) - v
6mm
Metal
M1.7
(2) - h w
3.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Hand Strap
Fig. 4-10
4-11

(1) Detach CN11, CN13, CN15 and then MMC P.C.B.
(2) Detach one screw (h × 1) and then the Main Dial Unit.

(1) The speaker wiring at the rear of Main Dial Unit should be run through the A part (in Fig. 4-11) for connection.
Note on Reassembling (1)
(2)
(2) - h
(1) (1) CN11
CN15
MMC P.C.B.
(1)
(1)
Main Dial Unit
CN13
h
2.5mm
Metal
M1.7
Fig. 4-11
4-12

(1) Peel off the Caution Seal, remove five screws (i × 1, l × 2, r × 1, C × 1), and separate the Left Cover and Cassette Arm Unit.

(1) Fold the FPC as shown in the figure when connecting it.

Arm guide assembly in Cassette Arm Unit : FLOIL C-1Z
Left Cover
Cassette Arm Unit
(1)
(1) - l
(1) - r
(1) - C
(1) - i
(1)
Cassette
Arm Guide
(1) - l
Caution Seal
Grease applying
Position i l r C
2.5mm 3mm 1.8mm 3mm
Metal Metal Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7 M1.7 M1.7
Floil C-1Z
Fig. 4-12
4-13
1-14 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 1

(1) Remove two screws (x × 2) and detach the LCD Unit.
(2) Remove two screws (l × 2) and detach the Battery Terminal Unit.
(3) Remove one screw (y × 1) and detach the Tripod Plate.

(1) Set the distance between the shadowed part of LCD-MAIN FPC and the step part of the Right Cover at 1mm as in the figure. Then
secure them with the UL tape.

Rear side of right cover
1mm
LCD-MAIN
UL Tape FPC
(2)
(2) - l
(1)
Tripod Plate LCD Unit

Battery Terminal Unit
(3) Right Cover (3) - y

(1) - x
(1) - x
l x y
3mm 4.5mm 4.5mm
Metal Metal Metal
M1.7 M2.0 M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 4-13
4-14
1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 2

(1) Separate the Recorder Key Unit from the Right Cover.
Note : The Recorder Unit is held in place by double-side adhesive tape. So, push it through the hole in the rear of
Right Cover by a thin stick so it is raised, and then pulled slowly to separate it.
Also, be careful not to damage the FPC when pulling it through the hole in Right Cover.
(1) Recorder Key Unit
Right Cover
Hole CAUTION
Fig. 4-14
4-15
1-16 Disassembly of LCD Unit 1

(1) Remove five screws (e × 5) then detach the LCD Top Cover while being careful with the Claw A.

(1) LCD Top Cover should be assembled after inserting the Claw A.
(1) - e LCD Top Cover

(1) - e
Claw A
(1)
(1) - e
e
2.5mm
Silver
Painted
M1.7
Fig. 4-15
4-16

(2) Remove CN901, CN902, CN903, unsolder at two places (B), and remove two screws (h × 2) to detach the LCD P.C.B., LCD
Shield the Back Light Unit and LCD Panel.

(1) Cover the element on the LCD P.C.B. with UL tape. Note, however, that UL tape should be attached so taht it will not protrube
from the LCD P.C.B.
(2) Mount the LCD P.C.B., LCD Shield and the Backlight Unit as in the Fig.4-16.
Note on Reassembling (1) CN902

CN901
UL Tape
CN903
(1)
(1) - h
(1) - B
LCD P.C.B.
Be sure to cover this LCD Shield

element without fail. (1) Back
Attach UL tape so that it will not protrude (1) - B Light Unit
beyond the side edge of the PCB. (1) - h
h
2.5mm
LCD Panel Metal
M1.7

1 : Pass the Back Light Wire through the hole 2 : Bend the Back Light wire, solder it,and fold the LCD
in LCD P.C.B. shield through 180 along the edge of the LCD P.C.B.
Bending direction Bending direction
LCD
Shield
CN903 CN901 CN902 CN903 CN901 CN902
IC902 IC902
T4201 T4201
Solder here.
Before passing the wire through the hole,

fit the protrusion at the perforations
in the LCD P.C.B. unit into the hole of the
Back Light Unit.
Fig. 4-16
4-17

(1) Remove one screw (j × 1) to detach the LCD Lock Switch.
(2) Separate one screw (h × 1), LCD Hinge Unit and LCD SW FPC.
(3) Remove two screws (D × 2), peel off the Magnet sheet and detach the Hinge Covers L,R.

(1) The magnet has polarities.
LCD SW FPC
(2)
(3) - D
Magnet Sheet (1) - j

(2) - h
(3)
Magnet
Hinge Cover L
(3) (1)
LCD Hinge Unit
Hinge Cover R
LCD Lock Switch
(1)

Hinge Cover R Hinge Cover L
h j D
2.5mm 3.5mm 4mm
Metal Black Black
The side with red paint (N) M1.7 M1.7 M1.7
should face upward. (self tap) (self tap)
Fig. 4-17
4-18

(1) Remove the LCD FPC sheet and the LCD FPC from the Hinge unit.

(1) Before using the LCD FPC of service part, cut the part of it as indicated in the figure.
Then, align the positions “1” with “2”, “3” with “4” respectively, and then fix them with the Kapton tape (DY9-3052-000) so that
it covers the LCD FPC.
(2) After wiring the LCD FPC around the Hinge Unit, be sure to wrap it with the LCD FPC Sheet before assembling.

LCD FPC, LCD FPC Sheet : Hanal FL778
Kapton Tape : Tape, Kapton DY9-3052-000
LCD FPC
Kapton
Tape LCD Hinge Unit
15mm
(1) 9mm
(1)
1~2mm
Kapton Tape
Align outside, and
attach tape securely.
LCD FPC
Sheet
2 4
1 3
15mm
9mm
Kapton Tape LCD FPC
1~2mm
Align outside, and

Hanal attach tape securely.
FL778
Fig. 4-18
4-19
1-20 Disassembly of CVF Unit

(1) Detach two screws (z × 1, A × 1), CN4102 and the Rubber, then remove the CVF Plate, CVF P.C.B. and the Cushion.
(2) Unsolder part B and remove the Back Light Unit.
(3) Detach the LCD Stopper, CVF Panel and Mask.
Note : Detach the LCD Stopper while being careful about the four claws.
(4) Remove the Clamp Washer, Finder Lever and Spring.
(2) Back Light Unit Clamp Washer

Finder Lever
(4)
Rubber (1)
Spring
CVF P.C.B.
(2)-B
(Solder here)
Cushion
CVF P.C.B.
Mask
(2)
(3)
CN4102
CVF Plate
(1) - A CVF Panel
Back Light Unit

(1)
(1)
LCD Stopper
(1) - z
UL Tape
CAUTION Claws
z A
3mm 3.5mm
Black Metal
M1.7 M1.7
(self tap) (self tap)
Claws
Fig. 4-19
4-20
1-21 Disassembly of Lens Unit 1

(1) Detach the Lens Rubber Ring.
(2) Remove two screws (o × 2), CCD Unit, CCD P.C.B., CCD Graphite, CCD Rubber and IR Filter.

(1) Align the CCD Graphite with the edges of CCD P.C.B. and squeeze in so that it contacts the legs of CCD.
(2) Be sure to attach the washer between the CCD P.C.B. and the CCD Unit.
(2) - o
CCD Graphite
Poly Washer
(2)
CCD
P.C.B.
Metal Washer
CCD Unit
CCD Rubber
Lens Unit
IR Filter
Lens Rubber Ring
(1)
Note on Reassembling (1) IR Filter

CCD P.C.B.
CCD Graphite CCD
o
Evaporated surface
(side that appears 6mm
LENS reddish when exposed Black
Bring in to light) M1.7
Align with edges contact with (self tap)
of CA P.C.B. legs of CCD.
Fig. 4-20
4-21
1-22 Disassembly of Lens Unit 2

(3) Remove five screws (B × 5), IG meter, and AF/PZ Motor. (Unsolder parts to be replaced (α).)

AF/PZ motor shaft: LOGENEST LAMBDA A-74 (CY9-8102-000)
IG Meter
(1) - B
Lens Unit
(1) AF Motor
(1)
(1) - B
(1)-α (1)
(1) (1)-α
(1)
PZ Motor (1) - B
(1) - B
(1) - B
B Logenest Lambda A-74
4mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 4-21
4-22
1-23 List of Screws Used
SYMBOL
SYMBOL
PARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUST REMARKS REMARKS ILLUST
(Coated with XA1-7170-307) Stepped Screw

a DA2-1455-000 3mm p XA9-1167-000 3.5mm
M1.7-3.0mm M1.4-3.5mm (METAL)
(Coated with XA9-1002-000) Stepped Screw

b DA2-1017-000 3mm q XA9-1260-000 3mm
M1.7-3.0mm M1.4-3.0mm (METAL)
(Coated with XA4-5170-557)

M1.7-1.8mm (thin head)
c DA2-1018-000 Self Tap 5.5mm r XA9-1000-000
(METAL) 1.8mm
M1.7-5.5mm

d XA1-7170-357 M1.7-3.5mm (METAL) 3.5mm s XA9-1002-000
(METAL) 3mm
(Coated with XA9-1001-000) Self Tap

e DA2-1015-000 2.5mm t XA4-9140-287 2.8mm
M1.7-2.5mm M1.4-2.8mm (METAL)
f XA1-7140-207 M1.4-2.0mm (METAL) 2mm u XA1-7170-207 M1.7-2.0mm (METAL) 2mm
(Coated with XA4-9170-407)

g DA2-1016-000 Self Tap 4mm v XA1-7170-607 M1.7-6.0mm (METAL) 6mm
M1.7-4.0mm
Self Tap
h XA1-7170-257 M1.7-2.5mm (METAL) 2.5mm w XA9-1004-000 M1.7-3.5mm (thin head)
3.5mm
(METAL)

i XA9-1001-000 2.5mm x XA1-7200-457 M2.0-4.5mm (METAL)
(METAL) 4.5mm
Self Tap Self Tap

j XA4-9170-359 3.5mm y XA4-9170-457
M1.7-3.5mm (BLACK) M1.7-4.5mm (METAL) 4.5mm
Self Tap
k XA1-7170-407 M1.7-4.0mm (METAL) 4mm z XA4-9170-309
M1.7-3.0mm (BLACK) 3mm
Self Tap
l XA1-7170-307 M1.7-3.0mm (METAL) 3mm A XA4-9170-357
M1.7-3.5mm (METAL) 3.5mm
Stepped Screw Self Tap

m XA9-1244-000 4.5mm B XA4-9170-407
M1.4-4.5mm (BLACK) M1.7-4.0mm (METAL) 4mm
n CB1-8698-000 M1.4-1.3mm (BLACK) 1.3mm C XA9-1274-000 M1.7-3.0mm (METAL) 3mm
Self Tap Self Tap

o XA4-9170-609 6mm D XA4-9170-409 4mm
M1.7-6.0mm (BLACK) M1.7-4.0mm (BLACK)
4-23
1-24 List of Disassembly Photos
Right Cover Unit Left Cover Unit
Left Cover FPC Separation of Top Cover
Left Side Camera Unit
4-24
MMC P.C.B. Camera / Recorder Unit
Finder Unit MAIN P.C.B. / AUDIO P.C.B.
4-25
2. Adjustment Procedures
2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement

After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows mini-
mum required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have been replaced or any
faulty condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly.
○ : Adjustment required
Camera system
Part name
No. Adjustment item SUB MAIN Adjustment setting
Lens CCD
PCB PCB
2-2 AF section
2-2-1 CZ Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-2-2 Zoom Performance Check ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-3 IS section
2-3-1 Gyro Offset Auto Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
2-3-2 Gyro Gain Adjustment ○ Product condition
2-3-3 EEPROM Writing ○ ○ Product condition
2-4 Camera section

2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-6 EEPROM Writing ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation ○ ○ Product condition
Recorder system
Part name
No. Adjustment item MAIN DMC Adjustment setting
PCB II
2-6 Recorder section
2-6-1 Recorder Setting for Destination ○ Product condition
2-6-2, 2-6-3 Y LEVEL / C LEVEL Adjustment ○ Product condition
2-6-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment ○ Product condition
2-6-5 SWP Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
2-6-7 EQ Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
2-6-8 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment ○ Product condition
DMC II
2-7 T ape Path Adjustment ○ T ape path adjustment setting
4-26
2-2 AF Section Adjustment

Preparation)
1) For CZ adjustment/zoom performance check, set the product condition.
2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Program AE : Auto Mode
ZOOM : Telephoto-end
CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02 m from lens front
Chart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.)
2-2-1 CZ Adjustment
CHART CZ adjustment chart

SPEC. Automatic adjustment : At STEP 3, DT : AA should be attained and the specified zoom performance shall be satisfied.
Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ adjustment in the service mode.
(3) Turn power OFF and then ON, and check the zoom performance.

CZ PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 1 WR **00 31 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "31'" is set up.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 0 WR 313A 90 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Date setting for adjustment is completed.
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "31'" is set up.
4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3100 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 01~08 BUSYAutomatic adjustment is started. T hen, it is
completed in 30 seconds approximately.
If any NG condition is encountered in automatic
adjustment, check the parts inside the lens
5 Judgment on result of adjustment 5 2 RD 3100 AA OK Adjustment is completed (result is OK).
Carry out the zoom performance check.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ FF NG Adjustment is completed (result is NG).
T ake the procedure again from the beginning.
2-2-2 Zoom Performance Check
CHART CZ adjustment chart

SPEC. “DT at address 30D2=”01" in steps (3),(4) below
Difference between “DTs at address 30D3” in steps (3),(4) below is within “±4 Hex”.
Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV, and set AF OFF.
(2) Perform slow-speed zooming from the telephoto position to the wide-angle position. Make sure that defocusing does not occur.
(3) At the wide-angle setting, read out data at the focus position according to the table below.
(4) Turn AF ON, and read out data at the focus position as in (3) above.
(5) Check whether or not the data read out in (3) and (4) satisfies the specification.
(6) Turn power OFF and then ON. Carry out zooming several times reciprocally for a distant object and check that defocusing does
not occur. (AF ON)
(7) If the results of check at steps (2), (5) and (6) are OK, the adjustment is completed. If the results are NG, carry out CZ adjustment again.

ZOOM CHECK PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "30" is set up.
2 1) Read out data in the setting 5 0 RD 30D2 "--" WAIT Data at address 30D2 is indicated.
shown at right. ↑ ↑ ↑ 30D3 "--" ↑ Data at address 30D3 is indicated.
4-27
2-3 IS Section Adjustment
Note)
1) Carry out the adjustment on a tripod or a vibration-free bench.
Preparation)
1) Carry out IS adjustment in a product status.
<Preparation for IS adjustment>

IS ADJ MODE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD **00 ↑ OK High address "32" is set up.
2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET Adjustment
SPEC. Automatic adjusutment
Procedure)
(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.
GYRO OFFSET PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
2-3-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment
SPEC. Date Writing
Procedure)
(1) Reset the data to be the original, referring to the table shown below.
GYRO GAIN PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 Gyro YAW gain adjustment
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3200 66 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
2 Gyro PIT CH gain adjustment
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3201 6F WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
2-3-3 EEPROM Writing
SPEC. Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, write the adjustment data (from 2-3-1 through 2) into EEPROM.
EEPROM WRIT ING PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.
4-28
2-4 Camera Section Adjustment

Notes)
1) Each adjustment data (2-4-1 to 2-4-5) becomes effective after it is written into the EEPROM as mentioned in 2-4-6. If power must
be turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the EEPROM write procedure as mentioned in 2-4-6.
2) The adjustments from 2-4-2 through 2-4-5 must be carried out in series.
Preparation)
1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition.
2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Program AE : Auto Mode
AF : OFF
Image stabilizer : OFF
Chart : Standard angle of view
<Preparation for camera adjustment>

(1) Referring to the table shown below, set the high address for camera adjustment mode.
CAM ADJ MODE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment
CHART Light box (5600°K)

SPEC. Automatic adjustment.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris Encoder.
IRIS ENC. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1)

SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (1).
WB (1) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
4-29
2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment
CHART Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart (white area at the left side)
M.EQ. Vectorscope
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT
SPEC. R : × 2.0(ratio to burst)104°, Ye : × 1.4 (ratio to burst) 168°
Procedure)
(1) For manual adjustment of color balance, change data at the following four addresses while observing a vectorscope.
CB PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
R-Y GAIN 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust 5 2 WR 3007 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
relevant data.
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
B-Y GAIN 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust 5 2 WR 3008 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
relevant data.
R-Y MAT 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust 5 2 WR 3009 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
relevant data.
B-Y MAT 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust 5 2 WR 300A "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress.
relevant data.
CHART Light box (5600°K), and CCA12 filter

Procedure)

Procedure)
2-4-6 EEPROM Writing
SPEC. Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, write adjustment data (from 2-4-1 to 2-4-5) into the EEPROM.
EEPROM WRIT ING PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
4-30
2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation
Notes)
1) Perform this adjustment only if a void pixel is found on the CCD.
2) Before starting this adjustment, turn power on for more than 15 minutes.
3) The automatic mode (2-5-1) and the manual mode (2-5-2) are available for this adjustment.
In the automatic adjustment mode, “NG” is recognized if there are more than two void pixels on the center area of the screen or
more than eight void pixels on the entire screen. (If NG is recognized, the automatic adjustment is not performed.)
In the manual adjustment mode, it is allowed to correct up to eight void pixels on the entire screen.
In this mode, an arbitrary point may be selected for correction.
2-5-1 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Automatic)
Preparation)
1) Carry out this correction in the product state.
2) Adjustment Conditions
Program AE : AUTO
AF : OFF
Demo mode : OFF
Procedure)
(1) Perform the CCD void pixel correction (automatic mode) according to the table shown below.
CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 High address setting
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 30 WAIT
2 CCD void pixel correction
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 300E 00 WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ −− OK Adjustment is completed. *
3 EEPROM writing
3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 300F 00 WAIT
* If the DT is “FF” , it is “NG” even through the ST is “OK”.
4-31
2-5-2 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Manual)
Note)
1) Use the full scan monitor for this adjustment.
Preparation)
1) Take the product condition for this adjustment.
2) Adjustment conditions
Program AE : LOW LIGHT
AF : OFF
Electronic zoom : OFF
M.EQ. Monitor TV
Procedure)
(1) Before switching to the service mode, press the data screen key on the LANC remote controller to turn OFF the data screen.
(2) Select the service mode, and then set up the CCD void pixel correction adjustment mode (manual) following the table given below.
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 FF WAIT
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "FF" is set up.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 RD FF00 00 WAIT Entering the CCD pixel missing compensation
mode is complete. (AGC MAX., Iris close)
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR FFFF 06 WAIT See table below for angle of CCD.
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK for selection.
(Unused marker is appeared at view angle of
"Area"G.)
*Angle of CCD for selection

CCD
B
F D
Area DT Angle of section
A 00 No shift (normal angle)
B 01 Sectioning at top center
C 02 Sectioning at bottom center Electronic
D 03 Sectioning at top right
A Vibration-proof
E 04 Sectioning at bottom right
(Normal field of view) Pixel area
F 05 Sectioning at top left
G 06 Sectioning at bottom left
G E
C
Fig. 4-22
(3) Press the data screen key on the LANC remote controller to turn OFF the data screen.
(4) Move an unused marker (arranged at left of screen) to the position where a pixel is missing. The movement is done by changing
the data at the address corresponding to each marker.
The addresses corresponding to the markers are shown in Fig.4-23
Notes)
1) The odd-numbered marker is for odd-numbered lines (ODD) and the even-numbered marker is for even-numbered lines (EVEN).
If the marker cannot be aligned with a pixel void position, use the marker for a different line.
4-32
2) As shown in the Fig.4-22, the pixel missing compensation over entire CCD area cannot be performed on a single screen due to the
electronic vibration- proof area. Therefore, before the adjustment, change the data of the STEP 3 to select the area for compensa-
tion.
If the marker is not appeared at this time, choose the area where the marker appears, move the marker toward the area for compen-
sation until it appears on the desired area, and write the data temporarily. Then, select the compensation area again, and move the
marker to the pixel void position.
FULL SCAN MONITOR

Marker Direction Address
1 H FF01
(ODD) V FF03 FF01
2 H FF05
(EVEN) V FF07
3 H FF09
(ODD) V FF0B
4 H FF0D FF03
(EVEN) V FF0F
5 H FF11
(ODD) V FF13
6 H FF15
(EVEN) V FF17
7 H FF19
*Missing
(ODD) V FF1B
8 H FF1D
(EVEN) V FF1F
Fig. 4-23
* The following table shows the procedure for moving marker 1.

1 1) Specify address in H direction and 5 2 WR FF01 D4 WAIT
set WR mode.
2) Change the data and then move the ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ ↑
marker (H direction).
3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ OK
2 1) Specify address in V direction and 5 2 WR FF03 A0 WAIT
set WR mode.
2) Change the data and then move the ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ ↑
marker (H direction).
3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ OK
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above, and register
the marker at the position where pixel
is missing.
(5) Carry out write-in to EEPROM according to the table below.

1 In case of markers 1 to 4
1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR FF20 00 WAIT
In case of markers 5 to 8
1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR FF21 00 WAIT
(6) Reset the service mode, and close the lens.
After ten seconds, check that missing pixels have been compensated for.
Notes)
1) Since the marker is larger than a pixel, although they may seem to be superposed on one another at adjustment, there may actually
be some deviation.
2) In marker overlap condition or when there are adjacent missing pixels within ±2 Hex in the V and H directions, writing is impossible.
4-33
2-6 Recorder Section Adjustment
Preparation)
1) Except for the tape-path adjustment, carry out adjustment in the product state.
2-6-1 Recorder Setting for Destination
SPEC. Data writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out the recorder setting for destination market place.
RECORDER DEST INAT ION PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 5 WR **00 01
3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * High address "01" is set up.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0112 F0 Function Select bit for USA
(For USA model)
2) Make the setting shown at right 6 4 WR 0112 F1 Function Select bit for JPN
(For Japan model)
3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ F0orF1 * T he recorder setting for destination
market place is completed.
2-6-2 Y LEVEL Adjustment
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
SPEC. Y=980 ± 20 [mV]
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Y level adjustment.
980 ± 20mV
Fig.4-24

Y LEVEL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 001E ADJ White raster is output.
2) For adjustment, change data properly. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
3) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.
4-34
2-6-3 C LEVEL Adjustment
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
SPEC. C=710 ± 20 [mV]
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out C level adjust-
ment.
710 ± 20mV
Fig.4-25

C LEVEL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 001F ADJ Green raster is output.
2) For adjustment, change data properly. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ Adjustment is in progress.
2-6-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment
SIGNAL COLOR BAR

MODE E-E (ANALOG LINE IN)
Procedure)
(1) Input a color bar signal to the analog line circuit from the pattern generator.
(2) Carry out AGC initial value adjustment according to the table shown below.

AGC INIT IAL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **04 --
2) Press the ST ORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed.
4-35
2-6-5 SWP Adjustment
MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1321-000)

Note)
1) Press the STORE key after the error rate is stabilized.
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out SWP adjustment referring to the table shown below.
SWP PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment
MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1321-000)

Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out C.FG adjustment referring to the table shown below.

C.FG PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
2-6-7 EQ Adjustment
MODE Playback of self-recording LP tape (conforming to the format of LP tape manufactured by Panasonic)
SPEC. After adjustment, an error rate should be 2×10 -5 or less.
Notes)
1) For error rate measurement, use a tape conforming to the format of LP tape manufactured by Panasonic.
2) For SP/LP selection in recording, use the Recorder menu.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out EQ adjustment.
(2) After adjustment, play the self-recorded LP part again and check that the error rate is within the allowable specified range.
(3) If the result of check is NG, perform EQ adjustment using the self-recording SP tape. Then, with this LP tape, perform EQ
adjustment again.
EQ PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Start LP recording.
2 1) Rewind the recorded part, and then
start LP playing back.
3 1) During LP playback, make the 7 0 WR **02 --
setting shown at right ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the ST ORE key. (For approx. ten seconds)
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.
4-36
2-6-8 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment
MODE During camera recording in product condition (AF : OFF, LCD PANEL : ON)
SPEC. Power supply voltage: 5.83 ± 0.02 [V]
Note)
1) Perform the adjustment after 4sec of recording start.
Procedure)
(1) Under the above condition, set a power supply voltage to 5.83 ± 0.02[V].
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out battery voltage drop adjustment.
UNDER CUT PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 2 WR **FF "ADJ"
2-7 Tape Path Adjustment
Note)
1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC II Service
Manual separately issued.
Preparation)
1) For tape path adjustment, make the recorder adjustment setting (P. 3-2).
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table given below, playback the alignment tape for tracking adjustment (DY9-1345-000), and carry out tape path
adjustment.
At step 2, adjust DT in a range of 01 to 0F so that the RF envelope will be 70% for tracking shift.
(2) After adjustment, restore tracking shift to the normal condition of the product state (DT: 00).
T RACKING SHIFT PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Play back the tracking tape.
2 1) During playback, make the setting 7 0 WR **FE 00 Product setting
shown at right.
2) Perform 70% tracking shift by ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 01~0F Degree of tracking shift being changed.
adjusting DT in a range of 01 to
0F.
3 1) Perform the tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state.
4-37
Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach the

transparent chart on a vectorscope display.
Color balance adjustment chart
NTSC ELURA20 MC A
ELURA10 A
R-Y
YL
B-Y
BURST
4-38
CHAPTER 5. PARTS LIST
CONTEN
EXPLODED VIEWS
Casing Parts Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-2
Right Cover Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-4
Left Cover Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6
Main Dial/Rear Cover Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-8
Recorder Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-10
LCD Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-12
Camera · Lens Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-14
CVF Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-16
Mechanical Chassis Section-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-18
Accessory Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-26
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-28
PARTS LIST ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-29
CAUTION
1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other marks.
Critical parts are marked with in this electrical parts list.
5-1
Casing Parts Section

5×2
1 6 7
Left Cover Unit 11

8 27
22
9 20
10
CVF Unit
a
18 19
3 (23) (26)
2 (25)
3 17
4 (24)
3 16×2 Camera •
Lens/Recorder 21 35×2
15 a
Unit
34
14 2×2
21×2
2 29 32
28 31
13×2
12
34
33
30 Right Cover Unit
5-2
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 XA4-9170-359 000 F 1 SCREW
2 XA9-1001-000 000 F 4 SCREW
3 XA1-7170-357 000 F 3 SCREW
4 XA1-7170-407 000 F 1 SCREW
5 DA2-1017-000 000 F 2 SCREW
6 DA2-0931-000 000 B 1 COVER, TOP
7 DA2-1018-000 000 F 1 SCREW
8 DA2-1015-000 000 F 1 SCREW
9 DA2-1473-000 000 B 1 COVER, MIC NEW
10 DA2-0868-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC
11 DA2-1021-000 000 C 1 SEAL, LCD T
12 D52-0130-000 000 B 1 LENS CAP ASS’Y
13 CB1-8698-000 000 F 2 SCREW
14 DF1-1630-000 000 B 1 LENS RING ASS’Y
15 DG1-4062-000 000 B 1 ZOOM SWITCH ASS’Y
16 XA1-7140-207 000 F 2 SCREW
17 DA2-1024-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
18 DA2-1023-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
19 XA1-7170-257 000 F 1 SCREW
20 XA9-1244-000 000 F 1 SCREW
21 XA1-7170-307 000 F 3 SCREW
22 DG1-4314-000 000 B 1 REAR COVER ASS’Y NEW
23 DS1-5387-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
24 DA2-0844-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, BATT LOCK
25 DA2-1479-000 000 B 1 KNOB, EJECT NEW
26 DA2-1504-000 000 B 1 COVER, AV NEW
27 DG1-4096-000 000 B 1 EYE PIECE ASS’Y
28 DA2-1453-000 000 B 1 COVER, REMOCON WINDOW NEW
29 DA2-1454-000 000 B 1 COVER, TALLY WINDOW NEW
30 DA2-1452-000 000 B 1 FRONT COVER ASS’Y NEW
31 DA2-1020-000 000 C 2 MAGNET
32 DA2-1465-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HOLDER U NEW
33 DA2-1466-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HOLDER L NEW
34 DA2-1016-000 000 F 2 SCREW
35 DA2-1455-000 000 F 2 SCREW NEW
5-3
Right Cover Unit Section
5×2 7
4
6 24
3×2
13
2
20×2
22 23
21×2
12 17
10
15 18
8
9
19×2
14×2
11 16
LCD Unit
5-4
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DH2-2183-000 000 C 1 FPC, BATTERY
2 DG1-4079-000 000 C 1 BATTERY TERMINAL ASS’Y
3 XA1-7170-307 000 F 2 SCREW
4 DA2-1025-000 000 C 2 CUSHION
5 XA9-1000-000 000 F 2 SCREW
6 DA2-0918-000 000 C 1 PLATE, FPC
7 DA2-1470-000 000 C 1 SHEET, INSULATION NEW
8 DA2-1462-000 000 B 1 COVER, GRIP NEW
9 DA2-1467-000 000 B 1 TAPE, GRIP COVER NEW
10 DA2-1461-000 000 B 1 COVER, RIGHT NEW
11 DA2-1472-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, HAND STRAP NEW
12 DA2-0843-000 000 C 1 TRIPOD
13 DA2-0842-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, GRIP BELT
14 DA2-0845-000 000 B 2 CUSHION, R COVER
15 DA2-1008-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, BATTERY
16 XA4-9170-457 000 F 1 SCREW
17 DA2-0917-000 000 B 1 COVER, FPC
18 DS1-5380-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
19 XA1-7200-457 000 F 2 SCREW
20 DA2-1009-000 000 B 2 CUSHION, LCD
21 DA2-1007-000 000 B 2 SEAL, R COVER
22 DA2-1014-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION
23 DG1-4316-000 000 B 1 RECORDER KEY ASS’Y NEW ELURA20 MC A
DG1-4097-000 000 B 1 RECORDER KEY ASS’Y ELURA10 A
24 DA2-1506-000 000 C 1 SHEET, JACK NEW
5-5
Left Cover Unit Section

a
9 6 17
Rear Cover
11
14 28
a 13
22
See the figure below.
Main Dial Ass’y
12 19 21
15 18×2
18 23
3
18×2
10
24 22×2
16×2
4 25
1
2
27
31
26×2
ELURA20 MC A ELURA10 A
7 9
30
5
6 8
29 20 32
5-6
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA2-1451-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW
2 DA2-0952-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FPC
3 DA2-0991-000 000 B 1 LABEL, LITHIUM 2
4 DA2-0953-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, EJECT SW
5 XA9-1274-000 000 F 1 SCREW
6 XA9-1001-000 000 F 2 SCREW
7 DA2-1009-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, LCD
8 DH2-4055-000 000 C 1 FPC, MMC-MAIN
9 XA9-1000-000 000 F 2 SCREW
10 DA2-0980-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD ELURA20 MC A
DA2-0981-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD ELURA10 A
11 DA2-0950-000 000 B 1 KNOB, P.SCAN
12 DA2-0881-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
13 DA2-0883-000 000 C 1 TAPE, C COVER
14 DA2-0944-000 000 B 1 PLATE, DIAL
15 XA4-9140-287 000 F 1 SCREW
16 XA9-1002-000 000 F 2 SCREW
17 DA2-1471-000 000 B 1 STRAP, HAND NEW
18 XA1-7170-207 000 F 5 SCREW
19 XA1-7170-357 000 F 1 SCREW
20 DG1-4078-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, MMC ELURA20 MC A
21 DG1-4289-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MMC NEW ELURA20 MC A
DG1-4290-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MMC NEW ELURA10 A
22 XA1-7170-257 000 F 3 SCREW
23 DA2-0994-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, GRIP BELT
24 DA2-0993-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MMC
25 DF1-1624-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE ARM ASS’Y
26 XA1-7170-307 000 F 2 SCREW
27 XA9-1004-000 000 F 1 SCREW
28 XA1-7170-607 000 F 1 SCREW
29 DA2-0986-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION NEW
30 DA2-0845-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, R COVER
31 DA2-1156-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, C ARM NEW
32 DA2-0967-000 000 C 1 COVER, SD HOLDER NEW ELURA10 A
5-7
Main Dial/Rear Cover Section

10
9
8
7
6
5×2
4 11
3
2
1 (16)
14
13
(17)
12
15
5-8
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA2-0978-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LITHIUM
2 DA2-0976-000 000 C 1 LITHIUM TERMINAL +
3 DA2-0977-000 000 C 1 LITHIUM TERMINAL -
4 DG1-4029-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LITHIUM
5 XA9-1004-000 000 F 2 SCREW
6 DA2-0974-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, TRIGGER
7 DS1-5385-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
8 DA2-0973-000 000 B 1 KEY, TRIGGER
9 DA2-1486-000 000 B 1 KNOB, AP NEW
11 DA2-1483-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETTE REAR NEW
12 DG1-4054-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, FE
13 DA2-1485-000 000 B 1 KNOB, OPEN NEW
14 DA2-1487-000 000 B 1 KNOB, FE NEW
15 DG1-4309-000 000 B 1 MAIN DIAL ASS’Y NEW ELURA20 MC A
DG1-4312-000 000 B 1 MAIN DIAL ASS’Y NEW ELURA10 A
16 DA2-1474-000 000 B 1 COVER, M DIAL NEW ELURA20 MC A
DA2-1477-000 000 B 1 COVER, M DIAL NEW ELURA10 A
17 XA9-1252-000 000 F 1 SCREW
5-9
Recorder Unit Section

Camera • Lens Unit
2
1 23
3 9
22
10
16×2
17×2 21 30
15 20
18
31
7 32
38 26
24
6×3 8
4 19
25 6
11 13×2
5 12 14×2
33
27
28 34
35
6
29
6×2
6 39
36 37
5-10
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DY1-8282-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT DMC II
2 DA1-9796-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CASSETTE
3 DA1-9903-000 000 B 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS
4 DA2-0859-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER
5 DY1-8273-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, SUB
6 XA1-7170-257 000 F 8 SCREW
7 DA2-0860-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION
8 DA2-1151-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
9 DA2-0897-000 000 C 1 SHEET, INSULATION
10 DA2-1152-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
11 DA1-9788-000 000 F 1 WASHER
12 XA9-1260-000 000 F 1 SCREW
14 XA9-1167-000 000 F 2 SCREW
15 XA9-1001-000 000 F 1 SCREW
17 XA9-1244-000 000 F 2 SCREW
19 DA2-1028-000 000 C 1 SHEET, AUDIO 2
20 DG1-4023-050 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, AUDIO NEW
21 DG1-4056-000 000 C 1 MIC ASS’Y
22 DA2-0997-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC FPC
23 DA2-0867-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, MIC
25 DH2-2174-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, MULTI-AUDIO
26 DY1-8379-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW ELURA20 MC A
DY1-8381-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW ELURA10 A
27 DA2-0863-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD MAIN 1
28 DH2-2175-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, SUB-MAIN
29 DH2-2182-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, HA SHIELD
30 DA2-1158-000 000 C 1 SHEET, SDRAM
31 DA2-1027-000 000 C 1 SHEET, AUDIO 1
33 DA2-0846-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MAIN
34 DG1-4028-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MULTI
35 DA2-0855-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GND
36 DA2-0832-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, MULTI
37 DG1-4051-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, JACK
38 DG1-3978-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y SUB-DMC
39 DA2-0895-000 000 B 1 LABEL, FUSE NEW
5-11
LCD Unit Section

15
14
9
13
8 12
7 16
6 17
2 11 8
18
10
19
1×2
8
20
3
21
4
5
23
22
26
24
25×5
5-12
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA4-9170-409 000 F 2 SCREW
2 DA2-0915-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE L
3 DG1-4065-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, LCD
4 DG1-4052-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, LCD SW
5 DA2-0914-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE R
6 DA2-1020-000 000 C 1 MAGNET
7 DA2-1019-000 000 B 1 SEAL, MAGNET
8 XA1-7170-257 000 F 3 SCREW
9 DA2-1464-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM NEW
10 DA2-0907-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD2
11 DA2-0906-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD1
12 XA4-9170-359 000 F 1 SCREW
13 DA2-0909-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, LCD LOCK
14 DA2-0908-000 000 B 1 KNOB, LCD
15 DS1-5380-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
*1 16 DH9-0831-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
*2 DY1-8274-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
17 DG1-7377-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (LCD)
18 DA2-0910-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD1
19 DG1-4024-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD
20 DA2-0911-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD2
21 DA2-1463-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW ELURA20 MC A
DA2-1498-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW ELURA10 A
22 DH2-2177-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD-MAIN
23 DA2-0912-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
24 DA2-1012-000 000 C 1 SHEET, FPC
25 DA2-1015-000 000 F 5 SCREW
26 DA2-1160-000 000 B 1 SHEET, LCD FPC
*1 : Same quality as the production line.

*2 : Free from the pixel dot.
5-13
Camera · Lens Unit Section
(5) 14
(4) 13×2
11 16 15
12
17
10
(5) (5)
9
8
2
2
1 (7)
(6)
(5)
(5)
5-14
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA2-0945-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS
2 DA2-1026-000 000 C 2 CUSHION
3 DG1-4066-000 000 C 1 LENS ASS’Y
4 YH8-0097-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASS’Y
5 XA4-9170-407 000 F 5 SCREW
6 YH7-0200-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, PZ
7 YH7-0201-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, AF
8 DH9-0836-000 000 C 1 FILTER, IR
10 DY1-8271-000 000 C 1 CCD ASS’Y
11 DA2-0899-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRAPHITE CCD
12 DG1-4025-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CCD
13 XA4-9170-609 000 F 2 SCREW
14 DG1-4026-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CA
15 DH2-2178-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CA-MAIN
16 DA2-1159-000 000 F 1 WASHER
17 XD1-1101-825 000 F 1 WASHER
5-15
CVF Unit Section

13
12
11
14
10
9
8
7
4
3
2 17
15
5 6
1
16
5-16
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA4-9170-309 000 F 1 SCREW
3 DA2-0869-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF
4 DG1-4027-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF
5 XA4-9170-357 000 F 1 SCREW
6 DH2-2179-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CVF-MAIN
7 DG1-4067-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (CVF)
8 DA2-0884-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
10 DA2-0870-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF
11 DF1-1628-000 000 C 1 CVF LEVER ASS’Y
12 DA2-0877-000 000 C 1 PLATE, FINDER RELEASE
13 CB1-5509-000 000 F 1 NUT, ONEWAY GEAR
14 DS1-5386-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
15 WG2-5194-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y, CVF
16 DA2-0873-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD STOPPER
17 DA1-9760-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MASK
5-17
DMC II
Mechanical Chassis Section-1

(2)
(3) 1
4 (9)
5×4
6
2×3
Slide Chassis
Ass’y
11
10
12
5-18
DMC II
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DG1-3861-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE HOLDER ASS’Y
2 DA2-0642-000 000 F 4 SCREW
3 DF1-1569-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE COVER ASS’Y
4 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER
5 DA2-0643-000 000 F 4 SCREW
6 DF1-1514-000 000 C 1 IDLER GEAR ASS’Y
7 DG1-3857-000 000 C 1 DRIVE GEAR ASS’Y
8 DY1-8283-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y (3CH)
9 DA2-0793-000 000 C 1 PLATE, TAPE GUIDE
10 DY1-8210-000 000 C 1 MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y
11 DA2-0758-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
12 DA2-0757-000 000 F 1 SCREW
5-19
DMC II

1 (8) (5)
(2)
(7)
(3)
(12)
(5)×2 (4)
(6)
(10)
(9)
(13)
(14)
(18)
19
(15) (14) (17)

(11)
(16)
5-20
DMC II
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DY1-8211-000 000 C 1 SLIDE CHASSIS ASS’Y
2 DA2-0712-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
3 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER
4 DA2-0703-000 000 C 1 EJECT LEVER
5 DA2-0642-000 000 F 3 SCREW
6 DA2-0661-000 000 C 1 COVER, PINCH ROLLER
7 DS1-0175-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
8 DG1-3859-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y
9 DS1-0172-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
10 DF1-1566-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, T SUB
11 DA2-0782-000 000 F 1 WASHER
12 DA2-0660-000 000 C 1 COVER, REVIEW ARM
13 DF1-1548-000 000 C 1 TENSION ARM ASS’Y
14 DA2-0645-000 000 F 2 WASHER
15 DF1-1549-000 000 C 1 TENSION BRAKE ASS’Y
16 DS1-0169-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
17 DH9-0812-000 000 C 1 TAPE DETECTION SW ASS’Y
18 DA2-0643-000 000 F 1 SCREW
19 DS1-0173-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
5-21
DMC II

8
1×2 9
7
2 10
12×3
3
5 11
14
6
6 4
15 17
21
12×2 16
13 FACE
20
18
22×2 19
5-22
DMC II
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA2-0780-000 000 F 2 SCREW
2 DA2-0645-000 000 F 1 WASHER
3 DA2-0747-000 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL
4 DF1-1546-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, S
5 DF1-1547-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, T
6 DA2-0781-000 000 F 2 WASHER
7 DF1-1544-000 000 C 1 T GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
8 DF1-1550-000 000 C 1 S GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
9 DA2-0774-000 000 C 2 POST RING, RUBBER
10 DF1-1545-000 000 C 2 SKATE ASS’Y
11 DF1-1551-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y
12 DA2-0644-000 000 F 5 SCREW
13 DG1-3865-000 000 C 1 LOADING MOTOR ASS’Y
14 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER
15 DF1-1567-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, S MODE
16 DG1-3858-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, PINCH ROLLER
17 DS1-0174-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
18 XD2-1100-102 000 C 1 E RING
19 DF1-1517-000 000 C 1 PLATE, DRIVE GEAR
20 DA2-0586-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CP
21 DH2-2115-000 000 C 1 FPC, LOADING MOTOR
22 XA1-7140-147 000 F 2 SCREW
5-23
DMC II

5 5
8
12
6 10
1×2
7
9
2 11
4
REAR FACE 13
14
5-24
DMC II
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA1-7140-147 000 F 3 SCREW
2 DF1-1525-000 000 C 1 GEAR ASS’Y, TRANS.
3 DA2-0590-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 2
4 DF1-1520-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, PR CONTROL
5 DA2-0643-000 000 F 2 SCREW
6 DF1-1516-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 1
7 DF1-1518-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, MODE
8 DA2-0640-000 000 C 1 COVER, MODE GEAR
9 DG1-3860-000 000 C 1 GEAR, MODE
10 DA2-0666-000 000 C 1 COVER, LM GEAR
11 DA2-0604-000 000 C 1 GEAR, LM
12 DA2-0630-000 000 C 1 LEVER, LOAD
13 DA2-0638-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SLIDE LEVER
14 DF1-1522-000 000 C 1 LEVER, SLIDE
5-25
Accessory Section
CA-400
4
BP-406/412/422
JPN DU-300
A
E WL-D75/76
PLUG TYPE B
SDC-8M AS
3
(6)
(7)
5-26
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DY1-8276-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-406
2 D82-0642-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(A)
3 DY1-8383-000 000 C 1 CARD, SD SDC-8M ELURA20 MC A
4 D82-0660-000 000 C 1 DOCKING UNIT DU-300
5 D83-0562-000 000 C 1 WL-D75A WIRELESS CONTROLLER ELURA20 MC A
D83-0572-000 000 C 1 WL-D76A WIRELESS CONTROLLER ELURA10 A
6 DY1-8121-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY
7 DY1-8119-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(A)
5-27
ELECTRICAL PARTS
CN100 VS1-6640-027 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 27P
CN3401 WS1-5879-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, DV
FU3201 WD1-5062-000 000 D 1 FUSE
FU3202 WD1-5062-000 000 D 1 FUSE
JC WS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, A/V
SW WC4-5155-000 000 C 1 SWITCH, TRIGGER
SW101 WC5-5134-000 000 C 1 SWITCH, DIAL
5-28
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
17 CB1-5509-000 000 F 1 NUT, ONEWAY GEAR
3 CB1-8698-000 000 F 2 SCREW
3 D52-0130-000 000 B 1 LENS CAP ASS’Y
27 D82-0642-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(A)
27 D82-0660-000 000 C 1 DOCKING UNIT DU-300
27 D83-0562-000 000 C 1 WL-D75A WIRELESS CONTROLLER ELURA20 MC A
27 D83-0572-000 000 C 1 WL-D76A WIRELESS CONTROLLER ELURA10 A
17 DA1-9760-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MASK
11 DA1-9788-000 000 F 1 WASHER
11 DA1-9796-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CASSETTE
11 DA1-9903-000 000 B 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS
23 DA2-0586-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CP
25 DA2-0590-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 2
25 DA2-0604-000 000 C 1 GEAR, LM
25 DA2-0630-000 000 C 1 LEVER, LOAD
25 DA2-0638-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SLIDE LEVER
25 DA2-0640-000 000 C 1 COVER, MODE GEAR
19,21 DA2-0642-000 000 F 7 SCREW
19,21,25 DA2-0643-000 000 F 7 SCREW
23 DA2-0644-000 000 F 5 SCREW
21,23 DA2-0645-000 000 F 3 WASHER
19,21,23 DA2-0646-000 000 F 3 WASHER
21 DA2-0660-000 000 C 1 COVER, REVIEW ARM
21 DA2-0661-000 000 C 1 COVER, PINCH ROLLER
25 DA2-0666-000 000 C 1 COVER, LM GEAR
21 DA2-0703-000 000 C 1 EJECT LEVER
21 DA2-0712-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
23 DA2-0747-000 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL
19 DA2-0757-000 000 F 1 SCREW
19 DA2-0758-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
23 DA2-0774-000 000 C 2 POST RING, RUBBER
23 DA2-0780-000 000 F 2 SCREW
23 DA2-0781-000 000 F 2 WASHER
21 DA2-0782-000 000 F 1 WASHER
19 DA2-0793-000 000 C 1 PLATE, TAPE GUIDE
11 DA2-0832-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, MULTI
5 DA2-0842-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, GRIP BELT
5 DA2-0843-000 000 C 1 TRIPOD
3 DA2-0844-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, BATT LOCK
5,7 DA2-0845-000 000 B 3 CUSHION, R COVER
11 DA2-0846-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MAIN
11 DA2-0855-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GND
11 DA2-0859-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER
11 DA2-0867-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, MIC
3 DA2-0868-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC
17 DA2-0869-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF
17 DA2-0870-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF
17 DA2-0873-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD STOPPER
17 DA2-0877-000 000 C 1 PLATE, FINDER RELEASE
7 DA2-0881-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
7 DA2-0883-000 000 C 1 TAPE, C COVER
17 DA2-0884-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
5-29
PARTS LIST
11 DA2-0895-000 000 B 1 LABEL, FUSE NEW
11,17 DA2-0896-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION
15 DA2-0899-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRAPHITE CCD
13 DA2-0906-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD1
13 DA2-0907-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD2
13 DA2-0908-000 000 B 1 KNOB, LCD
13 DA2-0909-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, LCD LOCK
13 DA2-0910-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD1
13 DA2-0911-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD2
13 DA2-0912-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
13 DA2-0914-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE R
13 DA2-0915-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE L
5 DA2-0917-000 000 B 1 COVER, FPC
5 DA2-0918-000 000 C 1 PLATE, FPC
3 DA2-0931-000 000 B 1 COVER, TOP
7 DA2-0944-000 000 B 1 PLATE, DIAL
15 DA2-0945-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS
7 DA2-0950-000 000 B 1 KNOB, P.SCAN
7 DA2-0952-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FPC
7 DA2-0953-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, EJECT SW
7 DA2-0967-000 000 C 1 COVER, SD HOLDER NEW ELURA10 A
9 DA2-0973-000 000 B 1 KEY, TRIGGER
9 DA2-0974-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, TRIGGER
9 DA2-0976-000 000 C 1 LITHIUM TERMINAL +
9 DA2-0977-000 000 C 1 LITHIUM TERMINAL -
9 DA2-0978-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LITHIUM
7 DA2-0980-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD ELURA20 MC A
7 DA2-0981-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD ELURA10 A
7 DA2-0986-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION NEW
7 DA2-0993-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MMC
7 DA2-0994-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, GRIP BELT
11 DA2-0997-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC FPC
5 DA2-1007-000 000 B 2 SEAL, R COVER
5 DA2-1008-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, BATTERY
5,7 DA2-1009-000 000 B 3 CUSHION, LCD
13 DA2-1012-000 000 C 1 SHEET, FPC
5 DA2-1014-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION
3,13 DA2-1015-000 000 F 6 SCREW
3 DA2-1016-000 000 F 2 SCREW
3 DA2-1017-000 000 F 2 SCREW
3 DA2-1018-000 000 F 1 SCREW
13 DA2-1019-000 000 B 1 SEAL, MAGNET
3,13 DA2-1020-000 000 C 3 MAGNET
3 DA2-1021-000 000 C 1 SEAL, LCD T
3 DA2-1023-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
3 DA2-1024-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
5 DA2-1025-000 000 C 2 CUSHION
15 DA2-1026-000 000 C 2 CUSHION
11 DA2-1027-000 000 C 1 SHEET, AUDIO 1
11 DA2-1028-000 000 C 1 SHEET, AUDIO 2
11 DA2-1151-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
11 DA2-1152-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
7 DA2-1156-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, C ARM NEW
11 DA2-1158-000 000 C 1 SHEET, SDRAM
15 DA2-1159-000 000 F 1 WASHER
13 DA2-1160-000 000 B 1 SHEET, LCD FPC
7 DA2-1451-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW
5-30
PARTS LIST
3 DA2-1452-000 000 B 1 FRONT COVER ASS’Y NEW
3 DA2-1453-000 000 B 1 COVER, REMOCON WINDOW NEW
3 DA2-1454-000 000 B 1 COVER, TALLY WINDOW NEW
3 DA2-1455-000 000 F 2 SCREW NEW
5 DA2-1461-000 000 B 1 COVER, RIGHT NEW
5 DA2-1462-000 000 B 1 COVER, GRIP NEW
13 DA2-1463-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW ELURA20 MC A
13 DA2-1464-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM NEW
3 DA2-1465-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HOLDER U NEW
3 DA2-1466-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HOLDER L NEW
5 DA2-1467-000 000 B 1 TAPE, GRIP COVER NEW
5 DA2-1470-000 000 C 1 SHEET, INSULATION NEW
7 DA2-1471-000 000 B 1 STRAP, HAND NEW
5 DA2-1472-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, HAND STRAP NEW
3 DA2-1473-000 000 B 1 COVER, MIC NEW
9 DA2-1474-000 000 B 1 COVER, M DIAL NEW ELURA20 MC A
9 DA2-1477-000 000 B 1 COVER, M DIAL NEW ELURA10 A
3 DA2-1479-000 000 B 1 KNOB, EJECT NEW
9 DA2-1483-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETTE REAR NEW
9 DA2-1485-000 000 B 1 KNOB, OPEN NEW
9 DA2-1486-000 000 B 1 KNOB, AP NEW
9 DA2-1487-000 000 B 1 KNOB, FE NEW
13 DA2-1498-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW ELURA10 A
3 DA2-1504-000 000 B 1 COVER, AV NEW
5 DA2-1506-000 000 C 1 SHEET, JACK NEW
19 DF1-1514-000 000 C 1 IDLER GEAR ASS’Y
25 DF1-1516-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 1
23 DF1-1517-000 000 C 1 PLATE, DRIVE GEAR
25 DF1-1518-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, MODE
25 DF1-1520-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, PR CONTROL
25 DF1-1522-000 000 C 1 LEVER, SLIDE
25 DF1-1525-000 000 C 1 GEAR ASS’Y, TRANS.
23 DF1-1544-000 000 C 1 T GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
23 DF1-1545-000 000 C 2 SKATE ASS’Y
23 DF1-1546-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, S
23 DF1-1547-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, T
21 DF1-1548-000 000 C 1 TENSION ARM ASS’Y
21 DF1-1549-000 000 C 1 TENSION BRAKE ASS’Y
23 DF1-1550-000 000 C 1 S GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y
23 DF1-1551-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y
21 DF1-1566-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, T SUB
23 DF1-1567-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, S MODE
19 DF1-1569-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE COVER ASS’Y
7 DF1-1624-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE ARM ASS’Y
17 DF1-1628-000 000 C 1 CVF LEVER ASS’Y
3 DF1-1630-000 000 B 1 LENS RING ASS’Y
19 DG1-3857-000 000 C 1 DRIVE GEAR ASS’Y
23 DG1-3858-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, PINCH ROLLER
21 DG1-3859-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y
25 DG1-3860-000 000 C 1 GEAR, MODE
19 DG1-3861-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE HOLDER ASS’Y
23 DG1-3865-000 000 C 1 LOADING MOTOR ASS’Y
11 DG1-3978-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, SUB-DMC
11 DG1-4023-050 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, AUDIO NEW
13 DG1-4024-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD
15 DG1-4025-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CCD
15 DG1-4026-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CA
17 DG1-4027-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF
11 DG1-4028-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MULTI
9 DG1-4029-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LITHIUM
5-31
PARTS LIST
11 DG1-4051-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, JACK
13 DG1-4052-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, LCD SW
9 DG1-4054-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, FE
11 DG1-4056-000 000 C 1 MIC ASS’Y
3 DG1-4062-000 000 B 1 ZOOM SWITCH ASS’Y
13 DG1-4065-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, LCD
15 DG1-4066-000 000 C 1 LENS ASS’Y
17 DG1-4067-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (CVF)
7 DG1-4078-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, MMC ELURA20 MC A
5 DG1-4079-000 000 C 1 BATTERY TERMINAL ASS’Y
3 DG1-4096-000 000 B 1 EYE PIECE ASS’Y
5 DG1-4097-000 000 B 1 RECORDER KEY ASS’Y ELURA10 A
7 DG1-4289-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MMC NEW ELURA20 MC A
7 DG1-4290-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MMC NEW ELURA10 A
9 DG1-4309-000 000 B 1 MAIN DIAL ASS’Y NEW ELURA20 MC A
9 DG1-4312-000 000 B 1 MAIN DIAL ASS’Y NEW ELURA10 A
3 DG1-4314-000 000 B 1 REAR COVER ASS’Y NEW
5 DG1-4316-000 000 B 1 RECORDER KEY ASS’Y NEW ELURA20 MC A
13 DG1-7377-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (LCD)
23 DH2-2115-000 000 C 1 FPC, LOADING MOTOR
11 DH2-2174-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, MULTI-AUDIO
11 DH2-2175-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, SUB-MAIN
13 DH2-2177-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD-MAIN
15 DH2-2178-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CA-MAIN
17 DH2-2179-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CVF-MAIN
11 DH2-2182-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, HA SHIELD
5 DH2-2183-000 000 C 1 FPC, BATTERY
7 DH2-4055-000 000 C 1 FPC, MMC-MAIN
21 DH9-0812-000 000 C 1 TAPE DETECTION SW ASS’Y
*1 13 DH9-0831-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
15 DH9-0836-000 000 C 1 FILTER, IR
21 DS1-0169-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
21 DS1-0172-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
21 DS1-0173-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
23 DS1-0174-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
21 DS1-0175-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
5,13 DS1-5380-000 000 C 2 SPRING, COIL
9 DS1-5385-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
17 DS1-5386-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
3 DS1-5387-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
27 DY1-8119-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(A)
27 DY1-8121-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY
19 DY1-8210-000 000 C 1 MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y
21 DY1-8211-000 000 C 1 SLIDE CHASSIS ASS’Y
15 DY1-8271-000 000 C 1 CCD ASS’Y
11 DY1-8273-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, SUB
*2 13 DY1-8274-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
27 DY1-8276-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-406
11 DY1-8282-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT DMC II
19 DY1-8283-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y (3CH)
11 DY1-8379-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW ELURA20 MC A
11 DY1-8381-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW ELURA10 A
27 DY1-8383-000 000 C 1 CARD, SD SDC-8M ELURA20 MC A
VS1-6307-014 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 14P
VS1-6640-021 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 21P
VS1-6640-025 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 25P
VS1-6640-027 000 C 4 CONNECTOR, 27P
VS1-6640-031 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 31P
VS1-6674-005 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 5P
VS1-6674-006 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 6P
5-32
PARTS LIST
WC4-5155-000 000 C 1 SWITCH, TRIGGER
WC5-5134-000 000 C 1 SWITCH, DIAL
WD1-5062-000 000 D 2 FUSE
17 WG2-5194-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y, CVF
WS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, A/V
WS1-5879-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, DV
23,25 XA1-7140-147 000 F 5 SCREW
3 XA1-7140-207 000 F 2 SCREW
7 XA1-7170-207 000 F 5 SCREW
3,7,11,13 XA1-7170-257 000 F 15 SCREW
3,5,7 XA1-7170-307 000 F 7 SCREW
3,7 XA1-7170-357 000 F 4 SCREW
3 XA1-7170-407 000 F 1 SCREW
7 XA1-7170-607 000 F 1 SCREW
5 XA1-7200-457 000 F 2 SCREW
7 XA4-9140-287 000 F 1 SCREW
17 XA4-9170-309 000 F 1 SCREW
17 XA4-9170-357 000 F 1 SCREW
3,13 XA4-9170-359 000 F 2 SCREW
15 XA4-9170-407 000 F 5 SCREW
13 XA4-9170-409 000 F 2 SCREW
5 XA4-9170-457 000 F 1 SCREW
15 XA4-9170-609 000 F 2 SCREW
5,7 XA9-1000-000 000 F 4 SCREW
3,7,11 XA9-1001-000 000 F 7 SCREW
7 XA9-1002-000 000 F 2 SCREW
7,9 XA9-1004-000 000 F 3 SCREW
11 XA9-1167-000 000 F 2 SCREW
3,11 XA9-1244-000 000 F 3 SCREW
9 XA9-1252-000 000 F 1 SCREW
11 XA9-1260-000 000 F 1 SCREW
7 XA9-1274-000 000 F 1 SCREW
15 XD1-1101-825 000 F 1 WASHER
23 XD2-1100-102 000 C 1 E RING
15 YH7-0200-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, PZ
15 YH7-0201-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, AF
15 YH8-0097-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASS’Y
5-33
CHAPTER 6. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CAMERA SECTION-1
CAMERA SECTION-2
SYSCON SECTION
SERVO SECTION
AUDIO SECTION
VIDEO SECTION
LCD SECTION
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
TEMP SENS
ZOOM SENS
ZOOM MOTOR CVF P.C.B.

CN4101
30 31 20 21
CCD P.C.B. CA P.C.B. BACK 21P

31P LIGHT LCD
CN1000 CN1001
LI P.C.B. 2 1
1 2 2 1 2 1 ZOOM
20P LCD
19 20 20 19
CN1002 1 16 SW
FOCUS MOTOR CN4102
UNIT
FOCUS SENS 16P MIC UNIT
1 2
LENS UNIT IG METER FN4101
1 CN1 8
8P
EJECT SW
25 CN11 1
24 2
2P 1
CN15
2
EXP
1
4P CN13
4
FOCUS CN12 25P
SD CONNECTOR
1
10P 10P CN14
10 CN1402
6P 27P 5P 31P 20P

SD P.C.B.
27 CN200 1 CN102 31 1 21 CN1501 1
PLA D
CN1401
R
BACK LIGHT
Y
6 1 26 2 5 1 30 2 20 2
CA
R SPEAKER
VC 20P
POWER OFF CN1502 R-KEY UNIT
MO
VIE SD or MMC CN1301
1 2
P.SCARD
1 2 IC1401 IC1101
19 20 CAMERA DIC4
CA
26P
REC
MI-COM
N
5P FPC 5P 1 IC1601 IC4001

LOADING CN302 PITCH
27 26 V53
MOTOR RU01 5 SENSOR IC4003 40P
RECEIVER SIC
IC1502
(REMOTE CONTROLLER)
2P 29 30 EVF DRIVER MENU
CN304 6P
SW
50 51
CN3301 CN701
CN100
( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS II )
MAIN 30P FPC

SUB-DMC FPC U 33P 1
1 2
40 39 MAIN DIAL
6 1
4P CN303
CHASSIS 33
51P 27P
IC100
11P
1 MAIN CN801
MAIN DIAL 1 2 MI-COM
2 1
27 26
2 1
AUDIO P.C.B. 40 39
1 2
11 25P IC2100 40P
IC1601 IC801
YAW CN301 IC2301
VIF2 26P AIF LCD P.C.B.
SENSOR CN101 VIC2
25 24 2 1
DRUM 11P FPC SUB P.C.B. IC902
LCD DRIVER
MOTOR IC203
CN3302
2 26
TP2002 CN902
IC300 SUB 1 27 26P
SWP 1 MI-COM 1 8
MOTOR TP2001 1 2
DRIVE CN802 27P 1 6
10P CN2000
PB-RF
Metal contact (Pins' face down) 10 8P CN901 1 CN903 26
27 26
DMC II
2 1 MAIN P.C.B. 6P
IC3202
10
: SLIDE 10P FPC 10P CN300
DC/DC
14P CONVERTER
CHASSIS CONTROL
IC3201
DC/DC
1 WP4201 WP4202
CONVERTER 10P
13
CONTROL
14 CN3201
8P
Metal contact (Pins' face up) VIDEO 10P FPC
CN92
HEAD CN93
8 1
1 10
: MULTI P.C.B.
JACK FPC
BATTERY TERMINAL DC 14 CN91 1
JACK 15 28
28P
LCD UNIT
Metal contact Metal contact HALL IC
AV JACK
DUCKING UNIT
REMOTE MIC
10P
01 Sep. 2001 C CANON INC. 2001

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
LI P.C.B. CVF P.C.B. SUB P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. AUDIO P.C.B. LCD P.C.B.
CN1 CN4101 CN300 CN100 CN1402 CN3301 CN701 CN901
1 GND 1 GND 1 MIC1 1 CAN 3V 1 D0 1 GND 1 GND 1 PNL BT SW
2 GND 2 GND 2 MIC2 2 P GYRO 2 D1 2 GND 2 Lch 2 V GND
3 LI 3V 3 BL 5V 3 C IN 3 P OFFSET 3 D2 3 GND 3 Rch 3 LCD 3V
4 START/STOP SW 4 BL 5V 4 MIC3 4 GND 4 D3 4 GND 4 GND 4 PNL OPEN SW
5 PAE/GREEN 5 COM 5 GND 5 GND 5 D4 5 AUDIO R 5 Cch 5 V GND
6 MO5V 6 G 6 REC PRF 6 Y GYRO 6 D5 6 AUDIO L 6 GND 6 LCD 3V
7 VTR POWER LED 7 R 7 TR C 7 Y OFFSET 7 D6 7 A 3V CN801 CN902
8 CAM POWER LED 8 B 8 TR LED A 8 I SW 8 D7 8 A 3V 1 GND 1 PANEL R
BT1 9 BLK 9 TR LED K 9 GND 9 D8 9 GND 2 GND 2 PANEL G
1 LI+ 10 HCK1 10 TR E 10 DVDD 4.7V 10 D9 10 GND 3 GND 3 PANEL B
BT2 11 HCK2 CN301 11 RMC IN 11 XAGC CS 11 AUD I 4 GND 4 GND
1 LI GND 12 HST 1 W 12 TALLY LED 12 CAM SDO 12 GND 5 AUDIO R 5 GND
13 RGT 2 W 13 MSW AD 13 CAM SCLK 13 AMCLK 6 AUDIO L 6 C SYNC
14 DWN 3 COIL COM 14 GND 14 DSPCLK 14 AUD O 7 A 3V 7 SCLK1
CCD P.C.B. 15 EN 4 GND 15 GND 15 XTG RST 15 LRCK 8 A 3V 8 SOUT1
CN1000 16 STB 5 SENS COM 16 TAPE TOP 16 FID 16 WCK 9 GND 9 SIN1
1 CCD OUT 17 VCK 6 DPG 17 TAPE END 17 VD 17 GND 10 GND 10 LCD EEP CS
2 V2B 18 VST 7 DFG 18 REC PROOF 18 HD 18 GND 11 AUD I 11 LCD CEN
3 GND 19 VSS 8 V 19 DA CFG 19 VGATE 19 GND 12 GND 12 PNL OPEN SW
4 V2A 20 VDD 9 V 20 CAP ON 20 XTG SEN 20 GND 13 AMCLK 13 PNL BT SW
5 H2 21 VDD 10 U 21 CFG 21 TG NP SEL 21 SP - 14 AUD O 14 LCD ON
6 V3B CN4102 11 U 22 CAP VS 22 CCD -7.5V 22 SP + 15 LACK 15 LCD BL DN
7 H1 1 VDD CN302 23 CAP VS 23 CCD 15V 23 VTR UNREG 16 WCK 16 LCD 12V
8 V3A 2 VSS 1 LOAD (+) 24 CAP FWD 24 36M 24 VTR UNREG 17 GND 17 COM ADJ
9 +15V 3 VST 2 LOAD (-) 25 TAPE LED 25 CAM 3V 25 SCLK2 18 GND 18 PLL ADJ
10 V1 4 VCK 3 NC 26 SELCSLP 26 CAM 3V 26 SOUT2 19 GND 19 LCD 3V
11 RG 5 TEST2 (STB) 4 GND 27 SELCSLP 27 CAM 4.7V 27 DVDD 3V 20 GND 20 LCD 3V
12 V4 6 EN 5 DEW CN101 28 GND 28 AIF CS 21 SP - 21 LCD UNREG
13 GND 7 TEST1 (DWN) CN303 1 T REEL FG 29 GND 29 A EMP1 22 SP + 22 LCD UNREG
14 GND 8 RGT 1 W 2 S REEL FG 30 GND 30 XPD DA 23 VTR UNREG 23 LCD UNREG
15 -7.5V 9 HST 2 W 3 REEL LED CONT 31 GND 31 BEEP LEV 24 VTR UNREG 24 GND
16 SUB 10 HCK2 3 V 4 DRUM VS CN1501 32 SHUTTER 1 25 SCLK2 25 GND
17 NC 11 HCK1 4 V 5 DRUM VS 1 VDD 33 BEEP 2 26 SOUT2 26 GND
18 NC 12 BLK 5 SR LED K 6 DRUM ON 2 VSS 34 BEEP 1 27 DVDD3V 27 NC
19 NC 13 B 6 SR LED A 7 DFG 3 VST 35 XPD AD 28 AIF CS CN903
20 NC 14 R 7 SR C 8 DPG 4 VCK 36 A MUTE 29 A EMP1 1 NC
15 G 8 SR E 9 CAS IN 5 STB 37 AUD ON 30 XPD DA 2 CKH1
16 COM 9 GND 10 VTR UNREG 6 EN 38 A EMP2 31 BEEP LEV 3 CKH2
CA P.C.B. FN4101 10 CFG2 11 MO 5V 7 DWN 39 DVDD 4.7V 32 SHUTTER1 4 PCG
CN1001 1 BL 5V 11 GND 12 DA SPEEL 8 RGT 40 EXT CONT 33 BEEP2 5 XPCG
1 V2B 2 LED 12 CFG1 13 DVDD 3V 9 HST CN3302 34 BEEP1 6 HVDD
2 CCD OUT 13 CFG VCC 14 DVDD 3V 10 HCK2 1 XTPA 35 XPD AD 7 STH
3 V2A 14 BOT E 15 LOAD 11 HCK1 2 XTPB 36 A MUTE 8 XSTH
4 GND MMC P.C.B. 15 B EOT C 16 UNLOAD 12 BLK 3 TPB 37 AUD ON 9 HVSS
5 V3B CN11 16 EOT E 17 LMO CONT 13 B 4 TPA 38 A EMP2 10 CSH
6 H2 1 MMC RSV 17 MSW SENS 18 MIC1 14 R 5 GND 39 DVDD4.7V 11 G
7 V3A 2 MMC CMD 18 MSW VCC 19 MIC2 15 G 6 GND 40 EXT CONT 12 R
8 H1 3 GND 19 MSW VSS 20 MIC3 16 COM 7 AUDIO R CN802 13 B
9 V1 4 MMC VDD 20 LED K 21 MIC ON 17 BL 5V 8 GND 1 M GND 14 PCD
10 +15V 5 MMC CLK 21 LED A 22 GND 18 BL 5V 9 GND 2 M Lch 15 NC
11 V4 6 CARD DET 22 GND 23 GND 19 GND 10 GND 3 M Rch 16 CSV
12 RG 7 MMC DAT 23 W+ 24 DEW 20 GND 11 AUDIO L 4 M GND 17 VVDD
13 GND 8 LAC OUT 24 W- 25 DEW 21 NC 12 GND 5 M GND 18 ENB
14 GND 9 GND 25 H- CN102 CN1502 13 PLUG IN 6 HP COM 19 XENB
15 SUB 10 GND 26 U 1 AD KEY1 1 GND 14 V I/O 7 HP Lch 20 VVSS
16 -7.5V 11 SP + 27 U 2 DVDD 3V 2 GND 15 GND 8 HP Rch 21 STV
17 NC 12 SP - 28 GND 3 AD KEY0 3 GND 16 GND 22 XSTV
18 NC 13 PAE/GREEN 29 H+ 4 NC 4 LCD UNREG 17 Y I/O 23 CKV1
19 NC 14 START/STOP SW 30 V+ 5 GND 5 LCD UNREG 18 GND MULTI P.C.B. 24 CKV2
20 NC 15 MAIN SW0 31 V- CN200 6 LCD UNREG 19 GND CN91 25 COM
CN1002 16 MAIN SW1 32 U+ 1 LI 3V 7 LCD 3V 20 C I/O 1 GND 26 NC
1 GND 17 MAIN SW2 33 U- 2 CAM POWER LED 8 LCD 3V 21 S DET 2 EXT MIC L
2 GND 18 AD KEY2 CN304 3 LANC DC 9 PLL ADJ 22 EXT DET 3 EXT MIC R
3 GND 19 CARD PR0 1 DEW 4 VTR POWER LED 10 COM ADJ 23 HP DET 4 GND
4 CAM 4.7V 20 MO 5V 2 GND 5 MO 5V 11 LCD 12V 24 GND 5 GND
5 CAM 3V 21 VTR POWER LED 3 GND 6 CARD PRO 12 LCD BL ON 25 LANC DC 6 HP COM
6 CAM 3V 22 LANC DC 4 MIC ON 7 AD KEY2 13 LCD ON 26 LANC OUT 7 HP L
7 36M 23 CAM POWER LED 5 MIC3 8 MAIN SW2 14 PNL BT SW 27 NC 8 HP R
8 +15V 24 LI 3V 6 MIC2 9 MAIN SW1 15 PNL OPEN SW 9 GND
9 -7.5V 25 LI 3V 7 MIC1 10 MAIN SW0 16 LCD CEN 10 GND
10 TG NP SEL CN12 8 LMO CONT 11 START/STOP SW 17 LCD EEP CS 11 GND
11 XTG SEN 1 MMC RSV 9 UNLOAD 12 PAE/GREEN 18 SIN1 12 GND
12 VGATE 2 MMC CMD 10 LOAD 13 SP - 19 SOUT1 13 GND
13 HD 3 GND 11 DVDD 3V 14 SP + 20 SCLK1 14 GND
14 VD 4 MMC VDD 12 DVDD 3V 15 GND 21 C SYNC 15 LANC OUT
15 FID 5 MMC CLK 13 DA SREEL 16 GND 22 GND 16 LANC DC
16 XTG RST 6 GND 14 MO 5V 17 LANC OUT 23 GND 17 GND
17 DSPCLK 7 MMC DAT 15 VTR UNREG 18 MMC DAT 24 PANEL B 18 HP DET
18 CAM SCLK 8 MMC DAT1 16 CAS IN 19 MMC VSS2 25 PANEL G 19 EXT DET
19 CAM SDO 9 MMC DAT2 17 DPG 20 MMC CLK 26 PANEL R 20 S DET
20 XAGC CS 10 CARD PRO 18 DFG 21 MMC VDD 27 NC 21 C I/O
21 D9 11 GND 19 DRUM ON 22 GND CN2000 22 GND
22 D8 12 CARD DET 20 DRUM VS 23 MMC CMD 1 HA GND 23 Y I/O
23 D7 CN13 21 DRUM VS 24 MMC RSV 2 H1A 24 GND
24 D6 1 MAIN SW1 22 REEL LED CONT 25 GND 3 H1B 25 GND
25 D5 2 MAIN SW2 23 S REEL FG 26 EJECT SW 4 HA GND 26 GND
26 D4 3 GND 24 T REEL FG 27 EJECT SW 5 H2A 27 GND
27 D3 4 MAIN SW0 25 SELECSLP CN1301 6 H2B 28 GND
28 D2 CN14 26 TAPE LED 1 DRIVE (-) 7 HA GND CN92
29 D1 1 CAM POWER LED 27 CAP FWO 2 HALL OUT (-) 8 H3A 1 GND
30 D0 2 VTR POWER LED 28 CAP VS 3 ZOOM B 9 H3B 2 EXT MIC L
31 D0 3 MO 5V 29 CAP VS 4 HALL IN (-) 10 HA GND 3 EXT MIC R
4 PAE/GREEN 30 CFG 5 ZOOM A CN3201 4 GND
5 START/STOP SW 31 CAP ON 6 HALL OUT (+) 1 BATT - 5 GND
6 LI 3V 32 DA CFG 7 ZOOM-A 2 BATT - 6 HP COM
7 GND 33 REC PROOF 8 HALL IN (+) 3 BATT - 7 HP L
8 GND 34 TAPE END 9 ZOOM-B 4 BATT - 8 HP R
9 EXP 35 TAPE TOP 10 DRIVE (+) 5 BATT - C93
10 FOCUS 36 GND 11 TM SENS 6 BATT - 1 LANC OUT
CN15 37 GND 12 FOCUS LED 7 BATT INFO AD 2 LANC DC
1 SP - 38 MSW AD 13 ZOOM SENS 8 BATT E3 3 GND
2 SP + 39 TALLY LED 14 FOCUS A 9 BATT + 4 HP DET
40 RMC IN 15 ZOOM LED 10 BATT + 5 EXT DET
41 DVDD 4.7V 16 FOCUS-A 11 BATT + 6 S DET
42 GND 17 VCC 12 BATT + 7 C I/O
43 I SW 18 FOCUS-B 13 BATT + 8 GND
44 Y OFFSET 19 FOCUS SENS 14 BATT + 9 Y I/O
45 Y GYRO 20 FOCUS B 10 GND
46 CAM GND CN1401
47 CAM GND 1 PHOTO
48 P OFFSET 2 GND
49 P GYRO 3 H PHOTO
50 CAM 3V 4 GND
51 CAM 3V 5 ZOOM AD
6 CK 3V
CAMERA SECTION-1 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
DATA COMMUNICATION
CA P.C.B. CAM 3V CN1002
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL CAM 4.7V CAM 4.7V 4 TO
CAMERA SECTION-2
38 41 31 15 46 CAM 3V 5
MAIN P.C.B.
Q1000 CAM3V CAM 3V 6 CN1402
IC1003 D0
AVDD
AVDD
AVDD
DVDD
DVDD
2
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL VOUT 8
Q1001
HD49325BHF D1
+15V +15V 8
3 -7.5V -7.5V 9
CDS/AGC/AD D0 30
SUB 16 D2
4 D1 29
CN1000 CN1001
D3
V1 6 CCD OUT 1 2 CCD OUT 26 CDS AGC A/D 5 D2 28
VSUB 16 15 VSUB CCD D3 27
OUT D4
V2A 2 6
V1 10 9 V1 D4 26
D5
V2B 1 V2A 4 3 V2A 7 D5 25
V2B 2 1 V2B D6 D6 24
V3A 4 8
IC1000 V3A 8 7 V3A CONTROL D7 23
D7
ICX250AQ V3B 3 V3B 6 5 V3B 9 D8 22
CCD V4
V4 12 11 V4 D8
10
D9 21
7
H1 7 8 H1 XAGC CS 20
D9
H1 14 H2 5 6 H2 11 SDO 19
RG 11 12 RG SCK 18
H2 15 CS
+15V 9 10 +15V 43 CLK 36M 7
RG 10 -7.5V 15 16 -7.5V SCLK DSPCLK 17
44 SCK
10
DUMC
TG NP SEL
ADCK
VDD 12
SHD
OBP
SHP
CCD -7.5V SDATA XTG SEN 11
PB
45 SDO
VL 9 CCD +15V V GATE 12
19 18 20 17 23 16
HD 13
CAM 3V IC1006
TC7WH08FU VD 14
IC1008 CAM 4.7V FID 15
TC7SET08FU
18 17 21 15 34 XTG RST 16
CCD P.C.B.
SHD
SHP
PBLK
OBP
CLPDM
NTSC/PAL 36 TG NP SEL 8 5
Vcc Vcc
SEN 32 XTG SEN 1 1
47 SUB 7 4
IC1001 V GATE 30 V GATE
TEMP 2 2
SENSOR
39 V1 CXD2488AR HDI 29 HD
41 V2A
TIMING GENERATOR 5
ZOOM VDI 28 VD 3
RESET 43 V2B 6
FID 27 FID
ZOOM 44 V3A
MOTOR TIMING SSCK 34 SCK
46 V3B GENERATOR
CONTROL SSI 33 SDO
40 V4
RST 3
13 H2 CKI
25
1/2
CCD 12 H1 MCKO C1042,R1031 CAM 4.7V
6
DSGATE
9 RG CAM 3V
VDD2
VDD1
AVD1
AVD2
7 LPF CAM 4.7V
VH
VL
5
4 14 16 48 24 42 45 5
FOCUS 6 12 14 Vcc
Vcc 1
MOTOR 1 Vcc
CAM 3V -7.5V 4
IG FOCUS 4
+15V 2
METER RESET 2 3 VCO 5
PD
4
IC1009 IC1007
TC7SH08FU IC1005 TC7SET08FU
TLC2933IPW
MAIN P.C.B.
TM SENS TO
IRIS GAIN CAMERA SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
LED RET IC1401
Q1302 I ENC
IC1404
MB88347LPFV
Q1302
D/A CONVERTER
CAM 3V (EVR)
CN1301
10 DRIVE(+) CAM 3V
17 VCC 2 10 OFFSET2 A3V 9
-
11 TM SENS 1 +
15 ZOOM LED 3 4 IE1 D3V 8

12 FOCUS LED
4 HALL IN(-) 5 5 IE2 LD 12 DA LOAD
-
8 HALL IN(+) 13 7 +
-
1 DRIVE(-) 9 14 Vcc 6 6 OFFSET SCK 13 SCK TAD FROM
+
- CAMERA SECTION-2
2 HALL OUT(-) 6 8 + 12 4 MAIN P.C.B.
-
6 HALL OUT(+) 7 10 IC1302 CAM 3V 7 DRIVE D1 14 SDO2 IC1401
5 ZOOM A Q1301 5 IC1302 LMV324MT
7 ZOOM-A IC1302 (2/3) OPE AMP
3 ZOOM B IC1303 (3/3) (1/3)
9 ZOOM-B (2/2) CAM 3V
14 FOCUS A
16 FOCUS-A
20 FOCUS B 2
1.5V -
18 FOCUS-B 1 +
19 FOCUS SENS F RST TO Vcc 3

13 ZOOM SENS CAMERA SECTION-2 IC1303 8
Z RST
MAIN P.C.B. NJM3414AV
IC1401 CAM 3V
OPE AMP
ZOOM A
5 OUT3A VDD 24 CAM 3V
(1/2)
ZA
ZOOM-A IN3 13 TO
19 OUT3B CAMERA SECTION-2
ZB
IN4 15 MAIN P.C.B.
ZOOM B IC1105
7 OUT4A FA
IN1 9 FROM
ZOOM-B FB CAMERA SECTION-2
17 OUT4B IC1304 IN2 11 MAIN P.C.B.
mPD16877MA F PSB
IC1104
FOCUS A EN1 10 FROM
2 OUT1A MOTOR DRIVE CAMERA SECTION-2
EN2 12 MAIN P.C.B.
FOCUS-A IC1401
23 OUT1B Z PSB
EN3 14
FOCUS B
4 OUT2A EN4 16
FOCUS-B VM1 1
21 OUT2B
VM4 8 MO 5V

CAMERA SECTION-2 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
DATA COMMUNICATION DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B.
DRMX A00 77 DRM A(0) DRM A(0) 21 A0
CN1402
DM-IXY DV2
ADATA0 162 CHD A0
TO
ELURA20 MC A DRMX A01 78 DRM A(1) DRM A(1) 22 A1 IC4002
27 CAM 4.7V
CAMERA SECTION-1 DM-MV4i MC E ADATA1 163 CHD A1 MB81F161622C
26 CAM 3V CAM 3V DRMX A02 79 DRM A(2) DRM A(2) 23 A2 SDRAM
CA P.C.B.
CN1002 25 CAM 3V
137 138 139 140 142 143 144 145 147 148 149 114 115 116 117 119 120 121 122 124 125 127 128 129 130 131 132 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 39 40 42 43 45 46 48 49 19 20 21 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 31 ONLY ADATA2 164 CHD A2
DRMX A03 80 DRM A(3) DRM A(3) 24 A3
+15V
DQ0
DQ15
A0
AA
A0
AA
M00
M0 F
23 +15V MO 5V
ADATA3 165 CHD A3
22 -7.5V -7.5V DRMX A04 81 DRM A(4) DRM A(4) 27 A4
1 D0 29 ADIN0 DVDD 3V ADATA4 166 CHD A4 DQ0 2 CPU D(0)
MEM CNT0 151 18 CS DRMX A05 84 DRM A(5) DRM A(5) 28 A5
2 D1
30 ADIN1 ADATA5 167 CHD A5 DQ1 3 CPU D(1)
3 D2 152 17 RAS VDD 1 DRMX A06 85 DRM A(6) DRM A(6) 29 A6
4 D3 1 5 31 ADIN2 IC1102 ADATA6 168 CHD A6 DQ2 5 CPU D(2)
5 D4
155 16 CAS MB81F161622C VDD 25 DRMX A07 86 DRM A(7) DRM A(7) 30 A7
IC1301 32 ADIN3 SDRAM ADATA7 169 CHD A7 DQ3 6 CPU D(3)
6 D5 MEM CNT3 156 15 WE VDDQ 38 DRMX A08 87 DRM A(8) DRM A(8) 31 A8
7 D6
4 TK11140S 34 ADIN4 DQ4 8 CPU D(4)
8 D7
REGULATER FM CLK 113 35 CLK VDDQ 44 DRMX A09 88 DRM A(9) DRM A(9) 32 A9
35 ADIN5 BDATA0 132 CHD B0 DQ5 9 CPU D(5)
9 D8 DQM 17 14 LDQM VDDQ 50 DRMX A10 89 DRM A(10) DRM A(10) 20 A10
10 D9 37 ADIN6 BDATA1 133 CHD B1 DQ6 11 CPU D(6)
VDD S1 33 DVDD3V 36 UDQM DRMX A11 92 DRM A(11) DRM A(11) 19 A11
11 XAGC CS
CAM SDO 38 ADIN7 BDATA2 134 CHD N2 DQ7 12 CPU D(7)
12 CAM SDO VDD S4 101 CAS 95 16 /CAS
CAM SCK
13 CAM SCK 39 ADIN8 BDATA3 135 CHD N3 DQ8 39 CPU D(8)
VDD S5 126 RAS 96 17 /RAS
24 CLK 36M
40 ADIN9 BDATA4 136 CHD B4 DQ9 40 CPU D(9)
14 DSPCLK VDD S6 157 DRWL 101 15 /WE
21 TG NP SEL BDATA5 137 CHD B5 DQ10 42 CPU D(10)
VDD S7 168 DRMDQMU 97 36 UDQM
20 XTG SEN 77 TGCLK
BDATA6 138 CHD B6 DQ11 43 CPU D(11)
19 V GATE CH1 OUT0 92 ADATA0 DRMDQML 100 14 LDQM
IC1106,X1101
18 HD BDATA7 140 CHD B7 DQ12 45 CPU D(12)
CH1 OUT1 93 ADATA1 DRMXCKE 102 34 CKE
17 VD VCXO
DQ13 46 CPU D(13)
16 FID CH1 OUT2 94 ADATA2 RESERVE 1 120 GP1 DRMXCLK 103 35 CLK
36MHz
15 XTG RST DQ14 48 CPU D(14)
CH1 OUT3 95 ADATA3 RESERVE 2 124 GP2 CXD00 34 CPU D(0)
LPF 141 PD
DQ15 49 CPU D(15)
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
CH1 OUT4 97 ADATA4 RESERVE 3 125 GP3 CXD01 35 CPU D(1)
VDD
VDD
C1112,R1117
C1113,R1118 DM-IXY DV2
CH1 OUT5 98 ADATA5 SIC REQ 160 SB REQ CXD02 36 CPU D(2)
27 HD ELURA20 MC A 44 38 13 25 1
CAM 3V IC1101 CH1 OUT6 99 ADATA6 DM-MV4i MC E SIC PSB 170 PW SAVE CXD03 37 CPU D(3)
IC1105 20 VD F722504D ONLY
CARD 3V
DIC 4 CH1 OUT7 100 ADATA7 SIC BBUSSEL 171 BBUSSEL CXD04 38 CPU D(4)
TC7WH08FK 26 FI
CH2 0 102 BDATA0 SIC RESET 172 RESET1 CXD05 39 CPU D(5)
8 CH2 1 103 BDATA1 SIC CS 175 SB SE CXD06 48 CPU D(6)

26 XCE
Vcc
2 CH2 2 104 BDATA2 CXD07 49 CPU D(7)
ZA 27M 16 X IN 28 XOE
7
CH2 3 105 BDATA3 Q104 CXD08 50 CPU D(8)
1 80 PWM ZA 11 XWE
SIC TO M 161 SB SD0
CH2 4 106 BDATA4 SIC TO M CXD09 51 CPU D(9) IC4000
6 M TO SIC M TO SIC 174 SB SDI MBM29LV800BA
ZB CH2 5 107 BDATA5 CXD10 52 CPU D(10) 8MFLASH
3 SIC SCK
SIC SCK 173 SB SCK CPU A(1) 25 A0
5 82 PWM ZB CH2 6 110 BDATA6 CXD11 53 CPU D(11)
Q103
TCK CPU A(2) 24 A1
CH2 7 111 BDATA7 CXD12 62 CPU D(12) CARD 3V
23 TCK
CPU A(3) 23 A2 VCC 37
76 PWM FA CXD13 63 CPU D(13)
VIC TDO 24 TDI
8 F MODE 0 169 96 DIC2S CS CPU A(4) 22 A3 DQ0 29 CPU D(0)
CXD14 64 CPU D(14)
Vcc SIC TDO 27 TDO
2 F MODE 4 170 95 DIC2S I/F CONT CPU A(5) 21 A4 DQ1 31 CPU D(1)
FA 79 PWM FB CXD15 65 CPU D(15)
7 TMS
FI OUT 85 53 DIC2S FI CPU A(6) 20 A5 DQ2 33 CPU D(2)
1 25 TMS FMCE 74
VD OUT 41 152 DIC2S VD SIC CS 14 SIC CS CPU A(7) 19 A6 DQ3 35 CPU D(3)
72 MCLK T RST 26 TRST FMOE 75
6
FB MCL KEN 5 164 MCL KEN RESEVE 1 149 RESERVE 1 CPU A(8) 18 A7 DQ4 38 CPU D(4)
3 FMWE 76
5 87 VICCLK XSYSRST 159 153 DIC XSYSRST RESEVE 2 78 RESERVE 2 CPU A(9) 8 A8 DQ5 40 CPU D(5)
JTAGTDO
JTAGTMS
JTAGTCK
151 CHV A0
JTAGTDI
F MODE 1 172 97 CAM/DIC/SIC SCK RESEVE 3 159 RESERVE 3 CPU A(10) 7 A9 DQ6 42 CPU D(6)
ELURA10 A
XCE 1
XCE 2
XCE 3
READ
IC1104 152 CHV A1
SDO
SCK
DM-MV4 E
SDI
F MODE 2 174 99 CAM/DIC/SIC SO SIC REQ 148 SIC REQ CPU A(11) 6 A10 DQ7 44 CPU D(7)
TC7WH08FK DM-MV4i E 153 CHV A2
175 176 177 180 165 86 164 3 9 10 4 SIC PSB 12 SIC PSB CPU A(12) 5 A11 DQ8 30 CPU D(8)
ONLY 154 CHV A3
SIC BBUSSEL 11 SIC BBUSSEL CPU A(13) 4 A12 DQ9 32 CPU D(9)
Q101 155 CHV A4
SIC RESET 10 SIC RESET CPU A(14) 3 A13 DQ10 34 CPU D(10)
CAM 3V 157 CHV A5
IC100 (2/3) CPU A(15) 2 A14 DQ11 36 CPU D(11)
SIC TDO
158 CHV A6
TMS M32120MCWGD52A MC32120MCWGD52B CPU A(16) 1 A15 DQ12 39 CPU D(12)
TCK DM-IXY DV2 ELURA10 A 159 CHV A7
CPU A(17) 48 A16 DQ13 41 CPU D(13)
ELURA20 MC A DM-MV4 E 141 CHV B0
6 16 34 48 56 88 101 130 140 157 182 104 105 109 CPU A(18) 17 A17 DQ14 43 CPU D(14)
DM-MV4i MC E DM-MV4i E
142 CHV B1
VCCV1
VCCB
VCCB
VCCB
VCCP
VCCP
VCCP
VCCB
VCCP
VCCP
AVCC
DIC TDI
TMS
TCK
CPU A(20) 16 A18 DQ15 45 CPU D(15)
TO MAIN MI-COM 143 CHV B2

CXA00 28 CPU A(0)
CAMERA SECTION-1 DIC4 RST DET 37
144 CHV B3
MAIN P.C.B. CXA01 29 CPU A(1)
IC1404-13,14pin 16 V GATE C to M DATA 86 C to M 198 CAM DIC RST
M to C 145 CHV B4
CXA02 30 CPU A(2)
12 XTG SEN M to C SCLK 84 CAM SCK CAM SCK 154 CAM CS
MMC ON 13 MMC ON 146 CHV B5
C to M CXA03 31 CPU A(3)
11 TG NP SEL M to C DATA 85 M to C 52 CAM RX IC4001
MMC DET 196 MMC DET 147 CHV B6 CPU A(0) 91 A0
15 XAGC CS C to D DATA 94
Q102
54 CAM SS TMG1
CXA04 32 CPU A(4) UPD70236AGC
CARD PRO 197 CARD PRO 148 CHV B7
CXA05 33 CPU A(5)
CPU A(1) 92 A1 V53
143 XVD D to C DATA 93 55 CAM SS TMG2 CARD 3V
PHOTO SW 56 CPU A(2) 93 A2
1 VDD1 CXA06 42 CPU A(6)
43 FID DIC SCLK 92 136 CAM M RST
HALF PHOTO SW 57 CPU A(3) 94 A3
21 VDD3 CXA07 43 CPU A(7) D0 71 CPU D(0)
13 XTG RST DIC CS 39 98 CAM/SIC SI
CPU A(4) 97 A4
CAM SCK 40 VDD4 CXA08 44 CPU A(8) D1 72 CPU D(1)
80 SCLK2 FIC CS 40 156 CAM REQ
CPU A(5) 98 A5
CAM SDO 54 VDD5 CXA09 45 CPU A(9) D2 74 CPU D(2)
82 SDO2 PWM CS 41
CPU A(6) 99 A6
TO ZOOM KEY 188
CPU A(7) 100 A7
CAMERA SECTION-1 23 Z PSB 67 VDD7 CXA11 47 CPU A(11) D4 76 CPU D(4)
MAIN P.C.B. IC1401 DIC READ 42
CPU A(8) 101 A8
IC1304 22 F PSB M31011MB CAM REQ 145
TO CAMERA MI-COM 90 VDD10 CXA13 57 CPU A(13)
CPU A(9) 102 A9
D6 79 CPU D(6)
CAMERA SECTION-1 189 TM SENS CAM DIC RST 27
MAIN P.C.B. CPU A(10) 104 A10
20 IRIS GAIN CAM RX 38
CPU A(11) 105 A11
21 LED RET CAM CS 36 CAM 3V
CPU A(12) 106 A12
CN1401 112 VDD13 CXA16 60 CPU A(16) D9 82 CPU D(9)
187 I ENC CAM SS TMG1 132
6 CAM 3V CPU A(13) 107 A13
TO 121 VDD14 CXA17 61 CPU A(17) D10 83 CPU D(10)
14 DA LOAD CAM SS TMG2 131 5 ZOOM AD
CAMERA SECTION-1 CPU A(14) 109 A14
CAM 3V 3 H PHOTO 130 VDD15 CXA18 72 CPU A(18) D11 84 CPU D(11)
MAIN P.C.B. 24 F RES SW
CN1301-13,19pin IC1603(1/2) 1 PHOTO
CXA19 73 CPU A(19)
CPU A(15) 110 A15
D12 87 CPU D(12)
25 Z RES SW CAM 3V TC7W66FU CPU A(16) 111 A16
SWITCH 1 SHUTTER1
D13 88 CPU D(13)
SI 3 99 SDO0 8 CPU A(17) 112 A17
Vcc 27M IC4003 D14 89 CPU D(14)
SHUTTER1 72 Vcc KS4MOU1298MBP
SO 4 98 SDI0 TCK CPU A(18) 113 A18
2 1
4 OUT VC 2 T VIC TDO
SIC D15 90 CPU D(15)
SCK 2 97 SCLK0 CAM 3V CPU A(19) 114 A19
ZOOM TMS
WP 6 32 X EEP WP 7 W T RST CPU A(20) 117 A20
IC1602 ADATA0 DVDD
8
CS 1 31 XEEP CS ENC 03JB ADATA1
68 VDD8 BCYST 5 61 BCYST VDD 18
Vcc CARD 3V
R/B 7 33 EEP RB 6
YAW SENSOR ADATA2 131 VDD16 CPUCKI 6 46 CLKOUT VDD 48
PHOTO
CAM 3V 7 ADATA3
IC1403 123 X OUT
5 ADATA4
139 VDD17 DSTB 7 62 XDSTB VDD 66
NT XPL SEL
AK6416AM Q4002
OCS VCC
121 X IN ADATA5 156 VDD18 HLDAK 9 12 HLDAK VDD 78

EEPROM
PLL VCC
P GYRO
Y GYRO
RESET
3 ADATA6
VCCR
1
176 VDD19 MXIO 10 55 M/XIO
I SW
VDD 86
VCC
VCC
VCC
Vcc
1 Vcc ADATA7
2 BDATA0 Q4003 RXW 11 56 R/XW VDD 96
2 118 10 1 100 120 124 150 180 3 184 183 IC1601 4 OUT VC 2
BDATA1
ENC 03JA ZOOM SW UNIT UBE 12 64 XUBE VDD 108
CAM 3V IC1605 PITCH SENSOR
BDATA2
CN304
TC75W51FU BDATA3 JPHACK 13 3 XDMAAKO VDD 118
CAM 3V
CN100
OPE AMP BDATA4
58 XIORD
CAM 2.3V 51 CAM 3V JPHRD 14
BDATA5 CARD 3V
CAM 3V 1 50 CAM 3V Q4000
BDATA6 JPHWR 15 57 XIOWR
Y GYRO 6 45 Y GYRO
TO VIDEO SECTION BDATA7
(NTSC) (PAL) P GYRO 2 49 P GYRO QINT 20 17 INTP3
(MAIN P.C.B.) VIC VD
I SW 8 43 I SW
1 JPHREQ 115 2 DMARQO
CAM 3V
5 6
3 CAM 3V RESETO 111 51 XRESET
CAM 3V
2 3 READY 110 40 XREADY
CAM ON CN12 CN11 CN200
CAM 2.3V
4 OUT IN 5 CAM 3V 12 CARD DET CARD DET 6 19 MMC VSS2 HLDRQ 109 11 HLDRQ
118 MC DT
X1401 DVDD 3V CAM 2.3V 4 MMC VDD MMC VDD 4 21 MMC VDD
20MHz DVDD 3V IC1603(2/2) 1 MMC RSV MMC RSV 1 24 MMC RSV 117 MC CMO
CPUMCK 106 49 X1
IC1402 DIC 1.7V
17 INTP3
PST596JNR DIC 1.7V 7 MMC DAT MMC DAT 7 18 MMC DAT CONIRQ 105
116 MC CLK
RESET +15V +15V 2 MMC CMD MMC CMD 2 23 MMC CMD
BS16 104 42 XBS8/BS16
-7.5V MMC 5 MC CLK MC CLK 5 20 MC CLK
7.5V
CARD 3V FROM SS SECTION 10 CARD PRO CARD PRO 19 6 CARD PRO Q4001
CARD 3V (MAIN P.C.B.) 19 VIC VD
SUB P.C.B.(1/2) MMC P.C.B.(1/2)

SYSCON SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
MAIN P.C.B.
VTR UNREG
DATA COMMUNICATION IC3203
DVDD 3V
TK71548S
4.7V REGULATOR HA 4.7V
182 157 140 101 88 66 130 48 34 16 6
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL IC3201
AVCC
VCCP
VCCP
VCCP
VCCP
VCCP
VCCB
VCCB
VCCB
VCCB
VCCB
MB3825APFF 1 IN OUT 2 LPF DVDD 4.7V
121 X IN
DC/DC CONVERTOR
3 DRUM ON 174
CONTROL
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL 1 123 X OUT
CAP ON 169
39 IC100 (1/3)
CAP FWD 171
SW F Q3202
LPF MO 5V
2 M32120MCWGD52A MC32120MCWGD52B
CH1 SELCSLP 175
SW F 21 DSC REGULATOR 6 5 4 DM-IXY DV2 ELURA10 A
1 ELURA20 MC A DM-MV4 E LMO CONT 168
46 3 DM-MV4i MC E DM-MV4i E UNLOAD 166
5 IN OUT 4 DIF 3V X100 CN100
E 3V ON
20MHz MAIN MI-COM LOAD 165 DVDD 4.7V DVDD 4.7V 10
CN3201 2 3 1 RMC IN 11
7 BATT INFO IC3219 MSW A/D 193
FU2302 TALLY LED 12
8 BATT E3 TK1128S 137 CAM PW ON
1 2 36 DEW DETECT 183 CAP VS 22
14 BATT +
4 3
2.8V REGULATOR CAP VS CAP VS 23
13 BATT + 184 KEY AD0 TAPE LED 172
Q3216 CAP ON 20
12 BATT + CH2
REGULATOR 6 5 4 185 KEY AD1 REEL LED CONT 176 REC PROOF 18
11 BATT + LPF HA 3V
1 2 1 CAP FWD 24
10 BATT + MENU DIAL REC PROOF SW 63
4 3 50 SEL CSLP 26
9 BATT + 9 VCC LPF DVDD 3V
CASSETTE IN SW 62 SELCSLP 27
6 BATT - SW101
FU2301 14 VCC CPG CFG 21
5 BATT - LPF A 3V DIAL CCW
2 3 MSW AD 13
4 BATT - 28 VCC 2 1 65 DIAL CCW SW Q105
TAPE LED 25
3 BATT - LPF CARD 3V SWITCH
51 VCC DIAL CW TAPE END A/D 192 TAPE END 17
+
2 BATT - 6 64 DIAL CW SW
TAPE TOP 16
1 BATT 63 VCC LPF LCD 3V TAPE TOP A/D 191
B EXECUTE DA CFG 19
D
BATTERY 3 4 187 KEY AD3
42 VCC T REEL FG 190
-
PACK LPF LPF CAM 3V
TO
5 S REEL FG 189 SERVO SECTION
19 Q3201 Q3205 146 SUB REQ CN101
SUB P.C.B. (2/2)
SW KEY AD2 186 DRUM VS 4 CN304
CH4 CAM ON 147 SUB CS
Q3204 DRUM VS DRUM VS 5
SCK PAE/GREEN SW 59
REGULATOR 6 5 4 84 AIF/VIF/SUB SCK DRUM ON 6
1 LPF DIC 1.7V START/STOP 58 DPG DPG 8
SI
57 85 SUB SI DFG DFG 7
MAIN EEPROM CS 91
LPF DVDD 1.7V SO LMO CONT 17
86 AIF/VIF/SUB SO
OSDC/EEPROM/DA SCK 92 UNLOAD 16
2 3 LOAD 15
2 RESET 1 118 RESET IN OSDC/EEPROM/DA SO 93
S REEL TG 2
82 LANC OUT SOUT1 94 T REEL TG 1
3
33 DVDD 3V DEW 24
81 LONC IN
CH3 DEW 25
LPF AVDD 2.3V
29 Q3203 CAS IN 9
ON/OFF
REGULATOR 6 5 4 IC101 1 100 150 180 REEL LED CONT 3
30 LPF DVDD 2.3V
1 S-80928AMP MIC ON 21
56 Q3227 DVDD 2.3V MIC 3 20
LPF CAM 2.3V MIC 2 19
MIC 1 18
2 3 T REEL FG DA S REEL 12
DERR 174 PWMD RFGT 191
VTR UNREG VTR UNREG 10
S REEL FG
CERR 151 PWMC IC2301 RFGS 172 MO 5V MO 5V 11
Q3227
16 MBG102 DVDD 3V 13
IC801 DIF 3V VCC DFG 153
DVDD 3V DVDD 3V 14
D VS AUDIO VIC2
Q3206 AVDD 2.3V VCC DPG 130
REGULATOR 6 5 4 INTERFACE SCK
DVDD 3V VCC CFG 132
CH5 1
DERR IC2100 SO
15
DIF 3V DIF 3V 64 VIF 2
DVDD 3V DVDD 3V DVDD
DVDD 4.7V DVDD 4.7V 2 3 (AV SECTION) 3.0V
XCS 1
HA 3V HA 3V
VTR 8 VCC
HA 4.7V HA 4.7V 1 SUB CS BATT AD 42 XCK 2
UNREG
A 3V A 3V 11
3 SUB REQ 6 RESET DI 3
AVDD 2.3V AVDD 2.3V BATT INFO AD 41
C VS SCK
LCD 12V LCD 12V Q3207 7 SCLK2 DO 4
CAS IN 20 5 GND
LCD 3V LCD 3V REGULATOR 6 5 4 SI
CH6 8 SIN2
DVDD 1.7V DVDD 1.7V 1 RMC PULSE IN 2
SO
E 3V E 3V
CERR
9 SOUT2
TALLY LED 29
IC201
VTR UNREG VTR UNREG 10
4 46 LCD ON
AK5440BH
LCD ON LI3 DET 23 EEPROM
LCD BL ON 2 3 47 LCD BL ON
MIC ON 30
EVF BL ON
31 EVF BL ON
REC CTL MIC3 37
DA CFG 34 REC CTL
TO MIC SCL 10
DA S REEL
AV SECTION
48 VTR ON MIC2 38
MIC SDA 11
6 LANC PW CONT
CAM 3V CAM 3V MIC1 39
CAM 2.3V CAM 2.3V E 3V
DVDD 3V DVDD 3V Q204 E3V DETECT 4
DIC 1.7V DIC 1.7V Q3213
Q3209 L3217 IC203
+ 15V + 15V IC3202 4 8 M37516M4 VREF 44 E 3V IC200 VTR UNREG
Q202 SW102
- 7.5V - 7.5V AN8049FHN REG. LPF LCD 12V S 8423RFS
PW CONT
VCC
SUB MI-COM
TO CARD 3V CARD 3V 14 VCC OSC DC/DC COVETOR Q3210 12 VCC 43 E3V REG. & RESET
CAMERA SECTION DATA 7
CONTROL CONT Q201
MENU
6 ON/OFF 10 16 X IN RESET 15
OUT 1 11 VTR VOLTAGE
10 Q3212 4
Q3208 L3216 UNREG Q202 DETECT
21 1 17 XOUT EJECT SW 21
REG. LPF CCD 15V 5.6V 8 3V REG
OUT 2 14 LIMITER REG 1 MAIN SW 2 24
19 11 Q3210
2 MAIN SW 1 25 6 SW 3V REG
CAM ON
16 Q3211
OUT 3 MAIN SW 0 26 RESET
13 Q3214 IC202
L3218 LITHIUM 3V
TL 1596CPW 3 VTR PW LED 27 5 CN200
ON/OFF X202
3 REG. LPF CCD -7.5V LANC INTERFACE 4MHz PAE/GREEN 12 TO
CAM PW LED 28
R KEY FPC 2 VOLTAGE
DETECT
3 START/STOP SW 11 SERVO SECTION
LANC ON
4 Q207 MMC P.C.B. (2/3)
ON/OFF 13 XCIN AD KEY 2 7 CN11
CAM PW LED
CN1 MO 5V MO 5V 5
14 XCOUT
AD KEY1 1 LI 3V 1
X201 Q207
AD KEY0 3 32.768KHz 22 CAM PW LED 2
VTR PW LED
DVDD 3V DVDD 3V 2 VTR PW LED 4
MAIN SW 0 10
CN102 MAIN SW 1 9
PLAY/ STOP AD KEY1 8
PAUSE 1 MAIN SW 2
SW4 SW1 3 AD KEY0 EJECT SW 26
2 DVDD 3V DVDD 3V EJECT SW 27 EJECT
FF REW
SW5 SW2 CN3302
LANC DC 25 TO
DE ON/OFF REC.P LANC OUT 26 SERVO SECTION
SW6 SW3 MULTI P.C.B. (1/2)
CN93

SERVO SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL SUB P.C.B. (2/2) DMC II

IC300
LB1190W
MOTOR DRIVE CN301
U DRUM
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL 59 U 11
MOTOR
V IC301 U 10
DVS U,V,W, 58
60 S 81256GPU V 9
DRIVER W
56 V 8
5.6V REGULATOR
COM W 2
23
W 1
PG
VCC2 41 3 OUT IN 3 VTR UNREG COIL COM 3
DPG 6 FG
DRUM ON POWER TIMING POSITION
16 SW CONT DETECT DFG 7
SENS COM 5
DPG
28 PG AMP 30
CN303
DPG
35 PG AMP 32 U 7
TO CN304 U 8
CVS V REG 31
SYSCON SECTION 41 DVDD 4.7V DVDD 4.7V 44 V 30
MAIN P.C.B.
CN100
40 RMC IN
U
V 31 CAPSTAN
39 TALLY LED DVDD
3.0V
55 W 32 MOTOR
29 CAP VS W 33
28 CAP VS CAP VS U+ 2
22 VCC1 V
31 CAP ON 53 U- 1
33 REC PROOF V+ 4
27 CAP FWD 2 POWER
SW
V- 3 FG
W
25 SELCSLP 51 W+ 11
30 CFG CFG W- 10
U+
38 MSW AD 50 H+ 5
26 TAPE LED H- 9
U.V.W. U-
34 TAPE END
DRIVER
49 C FG1 22 S-REEL
35 TAPE TOP C FG2 24
FWD/RVS V+
TO 32 DA CFG 40 48 DVDD 3.0V SR LED A 28
SW
SYSCON SECTION 21 DRUM VS SR LED K 29
MAIN P.C.B. V-
20 DRUM VS DRUM VS 47 SR E 26
CN101
19 DRUM ON 12 SELCSLP DVDD 3V SR C 27
W+
17 DPG DPG 46 B&EOT C 19
18 DFG DFG EOT E 18
W-
8 LMO CONT 45 BOT E 20
9 UNLOAD DVDD 3V LED A 13
H+
10 LOAD DVDD 3V 64 HALL 42 LED K 14
23 S REEL TG Q300 POWER H- MSW VSS 15
43 Q304 Q302
24 T REEL TG DVDD 3V MSW VCC 16
1 DEW CFG2 MSW SENS 17
37
16 CAS IN Q306
36
22 REEL LED CONT CFG1
38
4 MIC ON
VCC POW 5V MODE SW
5 MIC 3 5
6 MIC 2 3 DVDD 3V DVDD 3V
7 MIC 1
13 DA S REEL
LOD-
15 VTR UNREG VTR UNREG 61
4 DECORDER DRIVER CN302
14 MO 5V LOD+ LOD (+)
63 LOAD (+) 1
12 DVDD 3V LOD (-)
MO 5V LOAD (-) 2
11 DVDD 3V 10
DEW 5
9
DVDD 3V Q307 11 LOADING
7 MOTOR
8
Q307 6
CN300
TR E 1
DEW SENSOR
TR C 4
DVDD 3V TR LED A 3
TR LED K 2
REC PRF 5
C IN 8
Q305
MIC3 7
EOT DET MIC2 9
MIC1 10
MICON
BOT DET
T-REEL
Q301 DVDD
3V Q303
SWITCH RU01
DVDD 4.7V
2 REMOTE CONTROLER SAFETY

3 SW
LED 01 DVDD 3V
CASSETTE IN SW
MIC
MULTI P.C.B.(1/2)
CN93 CN91
TO
SYSCON SECTION 2 LANC DC LANC DC 16 TO LI P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B. 1 LANC OUT LANC OUT 15 DOCKING UNIT
CN3302
SW2
PAE/GREEN
FOCUS EXP
TO CN11 CN14 CN1

SYSCON SECTION 13 PAE/GREEN PAE/GREEN 4 5 PAE/GREEN SW1
MAIN P.C.B. START/STOP
14 START/STP SW START/STOP SW 5 4 START/STOP SW
CN200
18 AD KEY 2 FOCUS 10 6 MO 5V MO 5V
20 MO 5V EXP 9 3 LI 3V
24 LI 3V MO 5V 3 8 CAM PW LED
25 LI 3V LI 3V 6 7 VTR PW LED
23 CAM PW LED CAM PW LED 1
LITHIUM
21 VTR PW LED VTR PW LED 2 BATTERY
15 MAIN SW 0
16 MAIN SW 1 CN13
17 MAIN SW 2 MAIN SW 0 4
MAIN SW 1 1 POWER
MAIN
MAIN SW 2 2 DIAL MO 5V
MMC P.C.B.(2/3)

AUDIO SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
DATA COMMUNICATION
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL MULTI P.C.B. (2/2) JACK FPC

CN3401
DV
ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL CN91 CN93
TERMINAL
23 Y I/O Y I/O 9
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL 21 C I/O C I/O 7
20 S DET S DET 6
19 EXT DET EXT DET 5
1
DV SIGNAL 18 HP DET HP DET 4
AUDIO L 2 TO
8 HP R VIDEO SECTION
2 EXT MIC L CN92 MAIN P.C.B. (2/3:CAMERA, SS SECTION)
VIDEO 3 CN3302
7 HP L HP R 8
4
3 EXT MIC R EXT MIC L 2
DET 5
TO 6 HP COM HP L 7
DOCKING AUDIO R 6
UNIT EXT MIC R 3
HP COM 6
AUDIO P.C.B.
Q855
HPF
A 4.7V A 3V SP 5V A 3V
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 58 23 55
VCC VCC VREFL VDD
EXT CONT
- LPF 53 6 7 CN801
CN802 +
A 3V A 3V 7 TO
REF LINE VIDEO SECTION
8 HP R A/D A 3V 8
EXT MAIN P.C.B. (2/3:CAMERA, SS SECTION)
2 EXT MIC L 11 ON - ALC 12 DVDD 4.7V DVDD 4.7V 39 CN3301
7 HP L INT +
ALC 3 AUDIO L 6
MIC OFF
3 EXT MIC R INT AUDIO R 5
OFF SERIAL
6 HP COM 13 EXT I/O AUD I 11
WIND CUT
15 AUD O 14
14 LINE EXT CONT 40
ALC LPF 52 19 10 XPD AD 35
MIC ALC LRCK 15
OFF D/A 11 WCK 16
EXT
6 WIND CUT REC XPD DA 30
EXT 20 8 A M CLK 13
OFF MUTE PB
INT
IC801 LPF 50 A EMP 1 29
INT +
LA74200W REC MASTER CLOCK 9 A EMP 2 38
4 ON -
AUDIO IC802 S OUT 2 26
MUTE PB DE-EMP0 18
INTERFACE LPF 49 PCM3006 S CLK 2 25
REF +
-
A/D, D/A DE-EMP1 17 AIF CS 28
3 CONVERTER BEEP LEVEL 31
BEEP 1 34
MATRIX EVR 28 BEEP 2 33
SHUTTER 1 32
IC701(2/2) A MUTE 36
29 SP + 22
NJM4580E
BUFFER 2 1 64 63 62 61 60 SP - 21
EVR 48 VTR UNREG 23
6 VTR UNREG 24
7 HPF Q803
5 47 Q804
Q805
BEEP
42 LEVEL
Q856
51
Q812,Q813
Q814,Q815 BUZZER SHUTTER
L
25 MUTE DVDD 4.7V
2 MUTE
R IC803
1 56 MUTE
Q808,Q809,Q810,Q811 Q851
3 MUTE 46
R 5V
32 MUTE 5V
REGURATOR
MUTE
IC701(1/2) MUTE
L
NJM4580E 27 MUTE + AV DATA 39
L.P.F. LOGIC
30 HP COM CONTROL AV CLK 41
AIF CS 44
38 Q801
Q802
43 DVDD 4.7V 5V MUTE

OFF
DELAY
MICUNIT
L CN701 P-ON/OFF
MUTE
4 MIC L
C 2 MIC R Q852,Q853,Q854
5 MIC C
R

VIDEO SECTION DATA COMMUNICATION ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL DIGITAL (VIDEO + AUDIO) SIGNAL
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL DV SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B.(2/3:CAMERA, SS SECTION)

IC1503
MC74HC4053
SWITCH
DIF 3V AVDD 2.3V CN1502
PNL BT SW 14 TO
184 185 186 54 75 76 77 78 144 243 244 116 93 PNL OPEN SW 15 LCD-CVF SECTION
CG LCD P.C.B.
19 VD FRAME 15
TO CN3302 IC2100 CSYNCO 169 11 C SYNC 21 CN902
AVDD B1
AVDD B2
AVDD B3
AVDD A1
AVDD A2
AVDD A3
AVDD A4
AVDD A5
AVDD C
AVDD D1
AVDD D2
VDD PLL 1
VDD PLL 2
R R R
AUDIO SECTION 4 TP A LD502U C SYNC SEP 2 9 CSNC 1 R 20 HD CG R 16 12 Q1505 PANEL R 26
JACK FPC VF R 14
3 TP B VIF2 G 14 PANEL G 25
G 14 DSP CG G 17
2 XTP B 48 CLAMP 27MHz 4 VF G 98 CHARA 13 PANEL B 24
B 10
1 XTP A GCA B 13 DSP CG B 18 G SCLK1 20
VF B 35 FRAME 2
14 V I/O EQ LPF 36 73 Y IN SOUT1 19
DVDD 3V 5 VDD CLK 1 SCLK1 15
TO 13 PLUG IN HD 29 G LCD EEP CS 17
1
AUDIO SECTION 17 Y I/O 46 CLAMP Y CONT CS 2 OSDC CS 9 Q1504 LCD CEN 16
MULTI P.C.B. (2/2) OSDI0 55 B
20 C I/O Y/C SEP 40 90 CLAMP Y 5 SIN1 18
CN93 DATA 3 SOUT 1 B
21 S DET OSDI1 114 4 COM ADJ 10
23 HP DET BPF 21 33 C IN 8 OSC 3 PLL ADJ 9
22 EXT DET LUMINANCE DOTCLK 17 IC2600 VCC 16
LCD 3V LCD 3V 8
RESET
74 Y 0 IC2601 BU2991 LCD 3V
7 AUDIO R 10 CLAMP C CONT XINTO D 118 LCD 3V 7
CHROMINANCE
11 AUDIO L 97 C 0 S.75V04ANC CHARACTER LCD 12V LCD 12V 11
XINTO C 79 INVERTER
27 34 4 GENERATOR LCD ON 13
68 VD
TCK XINTO M 39 4 LCD BL ON 12
VIC TDO 30 17 VTR UNREG LCD UNREG 6
TCK 181
TMS 2 LCD UNREG 5
TRST 19 7 VCLK 1 TMS 182 VDD LCD 12V LCD 3V LCD UNREG 4
SHUTTER 1 25 5
SERIAL DATA 3 TRST 159
A DATA 0 15
CLK DATA CS
A DATA 1 X2302 TDI 134 DVDD 3V 128 OSDC RESET 5 41 37 63 19 55 20
CLAMP C
Q1507
A DATA 2 27MHz R R/R-Y
CSYNC
VCC
VCC1
VDD2
VDD
VDD
VCC3
TDO 179 144 XINT D 72
A DATA 3
1
A DATA 4 EADDR 0 16 145 XINT C
A DATA 5
VCC
8 VCLK 0
PANEL BOTTOH/TOP SW 61 IC1502
A DATA 6 7 11 20 26 31 32 37 45 47 12 13 14
EADDR 1 141 143 XINT M
PANEL OPEN SW 60
CXA3503R
A DATA 7
96 VRH 2
EADDR 2 140 109 TCK G G/Y EVF DRIVER
71 R OUT
B DATA 0 HA 4.7V 53 VRL 2 CLAMP 34
VIF CS
EADDR 3 38 105 TMS MIRR 8
SCK
Q1508
SO
B DATA 1 G OUT
31 VRLSW B B/B-Y CHROMA 36
B DATA 2 EADDR 4 99 110 TRST Q1501 70
B DATA 3 188 TPA B OUT
EADDR 5 104 MM TD0 103 TDI 32
B DATA 4
189 XTPA LPF COM
B DATA 5 EADDR 6 18 REF 42
25 E ADDR 0
B DATA 6 167 TPB
E DATA 0 19
FROM B DATA 7 24 BLK 60
147 XTPB CONTRAST
CAMERA SECTION 27M E DATA 1 40
MAIN P.C.B. 23 HCK1 61
149 A DATA 0
E DATA 2 60 R OSD R
22 58 HCK2 62
111 A DATA 1
E DATA 3 81 G OSD G CG
21 59 BRIGHT HST 64
46 A DATA 2 MIX
IC203 SCK E DATA 4 61 B OSD B
20 57 RGT 65
SUB MI-COM 106 A DATA 3
(SS SECTION) E DATA 5 62
SO 19 E ADDR 6 TST9 46
109 A DATA 4
E DATA 6 101
43 E DATA 0 TIMING FNB 66
64 A DATA 5 LOGIC GENERATOR
E DATA 7 121
IC2301 42 TST17 67
190 A DATA 6
MBG102 E DATA 8 82
41 VCK 68
107 A DATA 7 VIC2
16 SDAT
SCK
SEN
E DATA 9 100
CKO
CKI
40 VST 11
128 B DATA 0
E DATA 10 84
IC100(3/3)
14
39
15
M32120MCWGD52A MC32120MCWGD52B 21 22
85 B DATA 1
E DATA 11 103
38 DM-IXY DV2 ELURA10 A
170 B DATA 2 SCLK1
E DATA 12 119
37 ELURA20 MC A DM-MV4 E
43 B DATA 3 EVFSEN
E DATA 13 120
36
DM-MV4i MC E DM-MV4i E
75W 75W 75W
148 B DATA 4
E DATA 14 83 MAIN MI-COM SOUT1
33
Q2102 Q2101 Q2100 127 B DATA 5
E DATA 15 105
32
86 B DATA 6 CN1501
XRESET 146 31 R 14
44 B DATA 7
XECSV 112 G 15
30
48 VCLK B 13
DVDD 3V XERD 115
E 3V 29 COM 16
51 DVDD HB 1
XEWR 126 BLK 12
VIF 4.7V 28
71 DVDD HB 2 HCK 1 11
XECSI 125
Q2104 Q2301 5 27 HCK 2 10
63 DVDD HC 1
Q2105 HST 9
REC H 193 2 26 E DATA 15
165 DVDD HC 2 RGT 8
4
WIDE DET 18 XRESET TEST1(DWN) 7
HA 4.7V 204 DVDD HD 11 1
EN 6
3 XECSV
249 DVDD HD 12 TEST2(STB) 5
HA 3V HA 4.7V 44 VIC XERD VCK 4
24 DVDD HA 1
VST 3
LINE IN
45 VIC XEWR LCD 12V

72 DVDD HA 2 VDD 1
36 5 38
Q2103 REC 4 XECSI BL 5V 17
108 DVDD HA 3 REC CONT IC2000
ON MO 5V BL 5V 18 TO
DVDD 4.7V UTIL7 133 32
WIDE CONT 129 DVDD HA 4 LD502W Q1503 LCD-CVF SECTION
CVF P.C.B.
DVDD4.7V
VRP2 CN4101
152 DVDD HA 5 RDAT 214 35 H1A
A3V 46
CN3301 173 DVDD HA 6 H1B
45
7 A 3V LETTER CONT
Q2106 175 DVDD HA 7
8 A 3V HA 4.7V
H2A
39 DVDD 4.7V 176 DVDD HA 8 43
6 AUDIO L H2B 8 9 4
194 DVDD HA 9 XRDAT 235 34 42 PANEL IC CS 87 LCD CEN
5 AUDIO R
VDD
VCC
LCP RL
11 AUD I PB ON PANEL EEPROM CS 90 LCD EEP CS Q1502
196 DVDD HA 10
PB H 213 1
14 AUD O SOUT1 14 DI
217 DVDD HA 11 OSDC CS 127 OSDC CS
40 EXT CONT
SDLSEL 154 9 SDL SCLK1 13 CLK COM 5
35 XPD AD 238 DVDD HA 12 EVF SEV 80 EVF SEN
15 LRCK EVF DA LOAD 12 LD PLL 2
227 AUD 1 I EVF DA LOAD 83 EVF DA LOAD
16 WCK
DA CFG 15
30 XPD DA 248 AUD 1 O 21 15 VCO HI MAIN EEPROM CS 91 MAIN EEP CS IC1501
13 A M CLK
OSDC/EEPROM/DA SCK 92 SCLK1
MB88347PFV SW F 3
229 LRCK
29 A EMP 1 D/A CONVERTER
38 A EMP 2 247 WCK OSDC/EEPRO VI/DA SO 94 SOUT1
26 GCA
S OUT 2 SIN1
207 AMCK EEPROM SI 93
25 S CLK 2 PBRF 245 17 EPH GDL EQ DA CFG FROM
209 IXI XPD DA 70 DA SREEL SS SECTION
28 AIF CS (MAIN P.C.B)
31 BEEP LEVEL X2302 VCO LCD ON
XPD AD 71
34 BEEP 1 24.576MHz 194 RAGC DIF3V LCD BL ON
33 BEEP 2 210 IXO SWP 237 2 A EMP2 73 EVF BL ON
DVDD3V
32 SHUTTER 1 REC CTL
A EMP1 74
36 A MUTE DVDD4.7V DIF3V
76 BUZAER CARRIER1
77 BUZAER CARRIER1
DVDD L1
DVDD L2
DVDD L3
DVDD L4
DVDD L5
DVDD L6
DVDD L7
DVDD L8
AIF/VIF/SUB SCK
22 SP + DVDD3V
AIF/VIF/SUB SO
XRCLK
HA3V
UTIL6
UTIL5
UTIL3
UTIL1
RAGC
UTIL4
UTIL2
UTIL0
RAPC
RCLK
21 SP - DVDD4.7V
BEEP LEDEL
46 WIDE CONT
HA4.7V HA3V
68 EXT CONT
23
139 LET CONT

196 WIDE DET
TO VTR UNREG
161 EXT DET
163 PLUG IN
72 A MUTE
160 HP DET
47 LINE IN
AUDIO SECTION 24 VTR UNREG VTR UNREG 28 59 70 91 123 208 219 224 246 225 240 201 234 156 183 180 200 222 178 29 30 13 11 12 28 8 25 26 22 23 HA4.7V
VIF CS
AIF CS
162 S DET
AUDIO P.C.B. A3V
A3V
GDH CONT 1
GDH CONT 2
GDH CONT 2
GDH CONT 1
CN801
EQ CONT 2
EQ CONT 1
EQ CONT 1
EQ CONT 2
GDL CONT
GDL CONT
DVDD 1.7V AVDD2.3V AVDD2.3V
XRCLK
XRCLK
84 86 2 67 LCD12V
9
RAGC
RAGC
AQAC
AQAC
RAPC
RAPC
RAFC
RAFC
RCLK
RCLK
LCD12V LCD3V
VTR UNREG
LCD3V
E3V
VTR UNREG DVDD1.7V
SCK
S0
E3V
BEEP1
BEEP2
DVDD1.7V
MMC P.C.B.(3/3) MEIN EEP CS

SCLK1 TO DRUM UNIT
SS SECTION
SOUT1 IC201-1-4(EEPROM)
CN15 CN11 CN200 SIN1
CN2000
1 SP - SP - 12 13 SP - H1A 2 CH-1 CH-2
2 SP + SP + 11 14 SP + H1B 3 HEAD HEAD
H2A 5
H2B 6

LCD-CVF SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
DATA COMMUNICATION
LCD P.C.B. CN901

PNL BT SW 1
LCD 3V 3
LCD 3V PNL OPEN SW 4
R R OUT
58 CLAMP 45 LCD 3V 6
TO CN902 Q902 GCA
VIDEO SECTION 13 PNL BT SW G G OUT 12V
MAIN P.C.B. 59 CLAMP AGC CNTRST GAMMA S/H BRIGHT 43
12 PNL OPEN SW
CN1502 CN903
6 C SYNC B OUT
B VR 12
1 PANEL R 60 CLAMP 40
VG 11
2 PANEL G GCA
VB 13
3 PANEL B 62 CSYNC
CLK VCOM 25
7 SCLK1 Q903 L CS CS 50
SO 10 HVDD 6
8 SOUT1 XSTH
E CS CLK CLK S 17 VVDD 17
10 LCD EEP CS 12 CONTROL
CEN I/F SHT XSTH 8
11 LCD CEN SO D1 18
SI 11 SHT 7
9 SIN1 LCD 3V CKH 2
19 CKH 2 3
17 COM ADJ 51
CKH 1 CKH 1 2
18 PLL ADJ VSY/I 20
30 PLL PCG 2 5
19 LCD 3V 3V PCG 2
21 PCG 1 4
20 LCD 3V Q904
PCG 1 XSTV 22
16 LCD 12V 12V 22
TIMING STV 21
14 LCD ON XSTV
GENERATOR 25 CKV 2 24
15 LCD BL ON
STV CKV 1 23
21 LCD UNREG Q902 26
KENB 19
22 LCD UNREG CKV 2
27 ENB 18
23 LCD UNREG IC901 PD
IC902 CKV 1
28
CSYO 16
MAGNET HALL IC
AK6420AM CSHO 10 (PANEL SIDE)
LCD UNREG
EEPROM LV4135W KENB (MAIN BODY
OSC 29
LCD DRIVE SIDE)
LCD 12V ENB
30
E CS
CS 1 CSYO
34
VC CPCD
LCD 3V 8 VCC CLK
OSC/O
SK 2 CSHO
OSC/I
VDD1
VDD2
VCC1
35
SO
DI 3
5 GND
SO 5 8 7 39 9 14 49 PNL OPEN SW PNL BT SW
DO 4
LCD UNIT OPEN Hi(OFF) Hi(OFF)
PD
LCD
PLL ADJ PLL 12V 3V T4201 CLOSE LO(ON) Hi(OFF)
CPU9D25
4 ON/OFF WP4201 INVERT Hi(OFF) LO(ON)

LCD UNREG LCD UNREG
4 7
FB
10 INVERT LO(ON) LO(ON)
3 CLOSE
BACK LIGHT
IN-
1 2
- OUT
+ PWM 6 Q4203
1 WP4202
SWITCH
IC4201 5 6
AN8016NSH VCC 5 LCD 3V Q4202
DRIVER
DC/DC CONVERTER Q4204
DRIVER
CVF P.C.B.
FN 4101
BL 5V 1
LED BACK
2 LIGHT
Q4103
LED
DRIVE
Q4101
LED
DRIVE CVF
TO CN4101 PANEL
VIDEO SECTION 3 BL 5V
MAIN P.C.B. 4 BL 5V CN4102
CN1501
7 R COM 16
6 G R 14
8 B G 15
5 COM B 13
9 BLK BLK 12
10 HCK 1 HCK 1 11
11 HCK 2 HCK 2 10
12 HST HST 9
13 RGT RGT 8
14 TEST1(DWN) TEST1(DWN) 7
15 EN EN 6
16 TEST2(STB) TEST2(STB) 5
17 VCK VCK 4
18 VST VST 3
20 VDD VDD 1

Canon - Elura 10A, 20MCA - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon - Elura 10A, 20MCA - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Video Product

2-1 Comparative List for Functions and Performance

Item ELURA2 MC A, ELURA2 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A (this device)

Item ELURA2 MC A, ELURA2 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A (this device)

Item ELURA2 MC A, ELURA2 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A (this device)

Changed from D52A/B models (★ : New functions)

5-3 Hand jitter compensation Yes

*1: ELURA20 MC A only

(Mirror mode is reset in recording search and warning.)

Card record Camera mode Card playback

5-11 Built-in microphone Stereo microphone (electret condenser microphone used).

6-5 Tape fast forward/rewind time

Sorce Record mode Images recorded to a card

Folder No. File numbers File contents

VCR/tape VCR/card (MC model only)

6-10 Other functions

ZR-1000 Zoom DU-300

DU-300 Docking Unit

BP-900 Series DU-300 TV

5. Viewfinder/ LCD Display Internal Display List

5-1 Camera Mode

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

40× digital zoom W T

Hand jitter compensation display

Recording mode display

Operation mode display Mirror mode (LCD)

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Program AE mode menu

Tape counter display

EXP lock display

Standard exposure value

Maximum exposure value

Remaining tape display

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Battery level Approx. 100%

Shutter speed display

Button type lithium battery low level

White balance display

Condensation warning display (blinks) Blinks in red.

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Card mix display (MC model only)

Digital feature display

Window cut display

When date and time are not set.

Audio mode display

16:9 mode display

Half-way press lock display

Focus mode display

5-2 VCR Mode

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Audio output display

Audio mix ratio display

Record mode display

Operation mode display

MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS

Reverse date/photo search

Zero set memory Same as in Camera mode

Remaining tape display Same as in Camera mode.

Audio dubbing/insert or search display

Battery level display Same as in camera mode.

Remote control display Same as in camera mode.

Battery warning display Same as in camera mode.

Condensation warning display Same as in camera mode.